Limit Td001 en P

Limit Switches
Contents
General Information Quick Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5--2

Technical Definitions and Terminology . . . . . . . . . page 5--6
Application Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5--8
Products 801 General Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5--9

802DN DeviceNett Limit Switches . . . . . . . . . . page 10--15
802G Gravity Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5--13
802M/802MC Pre-Wired Factory Sealed
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5--15
802M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5--16
802MC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5--30
802R Sealed Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5--34
802T Oiltight
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5--40
Plug-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5--41
Low Energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5--48
NonPlug-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5--54
802X Watertight or Hazardous Location . . . . . . page 5--74
802XR Sealed Contact Hazardous Location . . page 5--81
802B Compact, Precision and Small Precision . page 5--87
802T Safety Limit Switches (DALS) . . . . . . . . . page 5--109
440P IEC-Style Safety Limit Switches
22mm Compact Metal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5--114
22mm Small Plastic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5--116
30mm Large Metal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5--122
15mm Plastic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5--128
Operating Levers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5--130
Indexes Cat. No. Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 13--1

Comprehensive Product Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 14--1
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs.

Preferred availability cat. nos. are printed in bold.
5--1
Limit Switches
Quick Selection Guide
801 802G 802M and 802MC 802R

General Purpose Gravity Return Pre-Wired Factory Sealed Sealed Contact
Specifications
Description x General purpose limit switch for a x Plug-in gravity return switch x Compact, prewired switch x Similar construction to the 802T
wide variety of applications x Designed for conveyor-type x Factory sealed to meet the nonplug-In
operations with small or lightweight requirements of demanding x Glass hermetically sealed reed
objects applications, wet or dry switch (used as the switching
element to provide high contact
reliability)
Features x Mounting option; surface x Mounting options: surface, x Cable entry and wire strands x Enclosure: gasketed, transparent
manifold (epoxy sealed to protect against plastic cover
fluids entering or wicking into the x Allows inspection of terminals
switch) without removing the cover
x Mounting options: surface. x Mounting option: surface
Contact Rating x NEMA A600 x NEMA B600 x 2-circuit: NEMA A600 x NEMA B600
4-circuit: NEMA B300
Temperature Rating x --0}40qC x 0}110qC x 0}80qC x --29}121qC

(32}104qF) (32}230qF) (32}176qF) (--20}250qF)
Actuators x Lever, maintained x Three adjustable rod levers x Lever, maintained x Lever
x Top and side push (with or without x Low operating force
rollers) x Top and side push (with or without
rollers)
x Cat whisker
x Wobble stick
Enclosure x NEMA Type 1, Type 4 or Type 7 x NEMA Type 1 x NEMA Types 1, 4, 4X, 6P and 13; x NEMA Types 13
and 9 IP67 (IEC529)
Additional Info x See page 5--9 x See page 5--13 x See page 5--15 x See page 5--34
5--2 Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs.

Limit Switches
802T 802T 802T 802X 802XR

Plug-In Style Low Energy NonPlug-In Style Watertight or Hazardous Sealed Contact Hazardous
Location Location
x Plug-in construction provides x Similar body style to standard x Ideal for applications which x NEMA Types 7 and 9 x Designed for hazardous
quick and easy installation 802T plug-in limit switches require heavy-duty pilot ratings x Designed for hazardous locations
x New front-mounting design and x Direct connection to PLCs and x High degree of versatility and a locations only x Contains sealed glass contact
method of mode change in head other low energy circuits rugged, oiltight construction x Class I, Groups B, C, D switch for greater contact
make it easy to apply Class II, Groups E, F and G, reliability
Class III
x Circuitry: 4-circuit version (for x Conduit and mini receptacle x Dual, air operated x Mounting option: surface x Mounting option: surface
most types the same size as the wiring options x 2-pole vertical or horizontal lever
2-circuit switches) x Plug-in style for ease of wiring x Operated time delay
x Seals: Viton seals for special x UL listed, CSA certified and CE x Mounting options: surface,
applications marked for all applicable cavity, manifold
x Mounting options: surface, directives.
manifold
x 2-Circuit: NEMA A600 x 1 N.O. and 1 N.C. contact x NEMA A600 x NEMA A600 x NEMA B600
4-Circuit: NEMA A300 x Slow break before make
x DC 0.40 VA load per pole max
and 0.025 VA load per pole min.
x --18}110qC (0}230qF); x --18}110 (0}230) x --18}54qC (0}130qF) x --46}121qC (--50}250qF) x --29}121qC (--20}250qF)
Optional: --40}110qC x --40}110 (--40}230) low temp Optional: --29}121qC
(--40}230qF), model (--20}250qF)
x Lever x Lever x Lever x Lever x Lever
x Maintained x Side push rod x Maintained, low operating force x Maintained, top and side push x Top and side push (with or
x Low operating force x Top push roller x Top and side push (with or (with or without rollers) without rollers)
x Top and side push (with or x Side push vertical roller without rollers) x Wobble stick x Wobble stick
without rollers) x Cat whisker x Neutral position
x Cat whisker x Wobble stick
x Wobble stick x Neutral position
x Neutral position
x NEMA Types 1, 4, 6P (select x IP30 x NEMA Types 1, 13 x NEMA Types 7 and 9 x NEMA Types 7 and 9
side rotary styles), 13 Class I, Groups B, C or D Class I, Groups B, C or D
Class II, Groups E, F or G Class II, Groups E, F or G
Class III
x See page 5--41 x See page 5--48 x See page 5--54 x See page 5--74 x See page 5--81

5--3
Limit Switches
802B 802B 802B 802T

Compact Precision Small Precision Safety Limit Switches
Specifications
Description x Compact metal body x Precision style limit switch x metal bodied for use in industrial x designed for use in control reliable
x Prewired to maintain enclosure x Industry standard mounting applications applications and safety
seals x Low trip and reset points for more x Twelve different styles available for applications per ISO 14119
x Industry standard mounting for precise sensing solving multiple applications
ease of installation.
Features x 3 m cable standard x 1/2 in. NPT conduit entry x 12 different actuators x Direct opening action
x AC or DC LED versions x Grounding screw x Screw termination x Snap acting contacts
x Low current versions x Booted models x Small size x Rugged metal construction
x Booted and panel mount versions x Side and flange mounting available x Booted and Panel mount versions x Long life and reliability
x UL/CSA and CE Marked for all x UL/CSA and CE Marked for all x UL/CSA and CE marked for all x Plug-in design
applicable directives applicable directives applicable directives x NEMA 6P/IP67 sealing
Contact Rating x SPDT Form C x SPDT Form C x SPDT Form C x 2-circuit: A600/AC--15
x NEMA B300 x 15 A @ 125/250/480 V AC x NEMA B300 Q300/DC-13
x 4-circuit: A300
Q300/DC-13
Temperature Rating x -10}70qC x -10}80qC x -10}80qC x --18C}+110qC

(14}158qF) (14}176qF) (14}176qF) (0F}+230qF)
Actuators x Rotary arm x Top push x Top push x Lever

x Center rotary arm x Top push roller x Top push roller x Top push roller
x Wobble stick x Top push cross roller x Top push cross roller x Side push vertical roller
x Top push x Roller lever x Hinge lever x Side push horizontal roller
x Top push bevel x One-way roller lever x Short hinge lever
x Top push roller x Roller lever
x Top push cross roller x Short roller lever
x One-way roller lever
x Short one-way roller lever
Enclosure x NEMA 1, 3, 4, 6, 12, 13 and IP67 x Nonbooted: NEMA 1 and IP 60 x NEMA 1, 3, 4, 6, 13 and IP67 x NEMA 4, 6P, 12, 13 and IP67
x Booted: NEMA 1, 3, 4 and IP65
Additional Info x See page 5--88 x See page 5--97 x See page 5--105 x See page 5--109

Limit Switches
440P- A 440P- C 440P- M 440P- M Operating Lever

22 mm Metal 22 mm Plastic 30 mm Metal 15 mm Plastic
Safety Limit switches Safety Limit switches Safety Limit switches Safety Limit switches
x Compact die-cast alloy metal x Conforms to EN50047 (22 mm) x Conforms to EN50041 (30 mm x x Small size with mounting hole x To be used with 802T, 802M,
body with prewired 2 m cable x Glass reinforced thermoplastic 60 mm) options 802MC, 802X and 802XR limit
exiting bottom or side of switch housing x Cast aluminum housing x Choice of actuator position switches
mounting for ease of installation x Most feature direct opening x Most feature direct opening x UL approved glass filled
x Industry standard mounting for contacts designed to meet IEC contacts designed to meet IEC polyester housing
ease of installation 947 947
x Choice of actuator heads x Available in snap-acting, slow x Available in snap-acting, slow
make/break with 2 or 3 pole make/break with 2, 3 or 4 pole
contact arrangement contact arrangement.
x Heads can be rotated in 90_ x Heads can be rotated in 90_
increments for flexible mounting increments for flexible mounting
x Rugged die cast enclosure x Available in1/2 in. NPT, M20 and x Available in1/2 in. NPT, M20 and x Positive operation, forced x Various lengths materials and
x Positive operation, forced QD versions QD versions disconnection of contacts styles to suit specific applications
disconnection of contacts (direct x Cat. 1 device per EN954--1, x Cat. 1 device per EN954--1, x Contacts, 1 N.C. & 1 N.O.
opening action) dual-channel interlocks suitable dual-channel interlocks suitable x CSA NRTL/C and CE Marked for
x Snap-acting contact actuation for Cat. 3 or 4 systems for Cat. 3 or 4 systems all applicable directives
x Contacts 1 N.C. + 1 N.O. x cULus, TÜV, CCC, and CE x cULus, TÜV, CCC, and CE
x Prewired 2 meter cable, bottom Marked for all applicable Marked for all applicable
or side exit directives directives
x UL Recognized, TÜV and CE x Mounting options: surface x Mounting options: surface
Marked for all applicable
directives
x 1 N.O. and 1 N.C. snap acting x A600/AC--15 x A600/AC--15 x 1 N.O. and 1 N.C. contact
contact, AC15/B330, DC x N600/DC--13 x N600/DC--13 x Slow break before make
13/Q300
—
x 2}+70qC x -25}80qC x -25}80qC x -25}80qC

(35.6}158qF) (-13}176qF) (-13}176qF) (-113}176qF)
—
x Roller plunger x Roller plunger x Roller plunger x Roller plunger x Rod levers
x Dome plunger x Dome plunger x Dome plunger x Roller levers
x Cross roller plunger x Hinge lever x Short lever
x Lever arm x Short lever x Adjustable lever
x Offset hinge x Rod lever
x Adjustable lever x Spring rod
x Large rubber roller x Telescope arm
x NEMA 1, IP66 and IP67 x IP66 x IP66 x IP30

—
x See page 5--114 x See page 5--116 x See page 5--122 x See page 5--128 x See page 5--130

5--5
Limit Switches
Technical Definitions and Terminology
Actuator: A switch mechanism that Operating Contact Position: The Snap Action: In this type of contact
when moved as intended, operates the position to which the contacts move structure, movement of the actuator
switch contacts. This mechanism when the actuator is deflected to or applies force to an overcenter
transmits the applied force from the beyond the actuator operating position. mechanism, which creates a fast
actuating device}the contact block, Operating Force: The straight line change in contact state once the
causing the contacts to operate. force in the designed direction applied overcenter position has been
Actuator Free Position: The initial to the switch actuator to cause the exceeded.
position of the actuator when there is no contacts to move to the operated Snap Action/IEC Positive Opening
external force (except gravity) applied to position. Action: This contact structure is very
the actuator. similar to the snap action contact with
Operating Torque: The torque that
Actuator Operating Position: The one addition: continued operation of the
must be applied to the actuator to
position of the actuator when the operating mechanism beyond the
cause the movable contacts to move to
contacts operate. normal snap action position applies
the operated contact position.
force directly to the normally closed
Actuator Resetting Position: The Overtravel: The movement of the (N.C.) contact if it has not opened with
position of the actuator at which the actuator beyond the contact operating the snap action mechanism. This helps
contacts move from the operated position. to ensure opening of even a welded
position to the “normal” position. contact. For example, if a contact has a
Pretravel (Travel to the operate
Differential Travel (Travel to reset contacts): Travel to operate the snap action operating point at 40q rotary
contacts): The angle or distance contacts from the actuator free position. movement, the direct opening action
through which the actuator moves from point may be at 60q or more. No direct
Slow Make-Slow Break: A type of opening action forces are applied to the
the contact operating position to the
contact structure with no overcenter N.O. contact.
actuator resetting position, or the
mechanism. Contacts move at a speed
distance between the operating point Total or Maximum Travel: The sum of
directly proportional to the speed of
and the release point. the pretravel and the overtravel.
operation of the actuator. Contacts may
Normal Contact Position: The position touch with little contact pressure.
of the contacts when no operating force
is applied.

Limit Switches
Application Considerations
Actuator Consideration
Free Position Interference Wrong
Wrong
End of
Wrong Non-Overriding
Overtravel
Free Position
Operated Right
Wrong Position
Wrong Right
Right End of Non-Overriding
Overtravel
Limit switches are designed for proper performance with Operating mechanism for limit switches should be so For limit switches with lever actuators, the actuating
the actuators with which they are supplied. designed that under any operating or emergency force should be applied as nearly perpendicular to the
Supplementary actuators should not be used unless the conditions the limit switch is not operated beyond its lever as practical and perpendicular to the shaft axis
limit switches are specifically designed for them. overtravel limit position. A limit switch should not be used about which the lever rotates.
as a mechanical stop.
Actuator
Free Position Wrong
Wrong Wrong Cam
Wrong
Operating
Overriding Cam
Wrong Position
Right
Cam Operating
Wrong Right Right Right Position Right
Overriding Cam Right Operated
Position
Where relatively fast motions are involved Cam or dog arrangements should be such A limit switch actuator must be allowed to For limit switches with push rod actuators
cam arrangements should be such that that the actuator is not suddenly released move far enough for positive operation of the actuating force should be applied as
the actuator does not receive a severe to snap back freely. the contacts. nearly as possible in line with the push rod
impact. Cams should be designed such axis.
that the limit switch will be held operated
long enough to operate relays, valves, etc.
Location and Installation

Non-overriding
Cam Non-overriding
Cam Cam
Wrong Right Wrong Right

Wrong Right
Limit switches should be mounted rigidly and in Limit switches should not be used in locations Limit switches should be placed in locations where
readily accessible locations with suitable where temperature or atmosphere conditions are machining chips do not accumulate under normal
clearances to permit easy service and replacement beyond those for which they have been specifically operating conditions.
when necessary. Cover plates should face the designed.
maintenance access point.
Wrong Right
Non-overriding
Wrong Right Wrong Right Cam
Limit switches should not be submerged in or The location of oiltight limit switches and the method of Limit switches should be mounted in locations
splashed with oils, coolants or other liquids. connecting them should be such that condensation in the which will prevent false operation by normal
conduit cannot enter the switch enclosure. movements of operator or machine components.

5--7
Limit Switches
Notes

Limit Switches
801
General Purpose
801-- ASA11 801-- ASC17 801-- CMC21 801-- FSC148 801-- ASC1411
Description Figure 6 Figure 14

The Bulletin 801 line of general purpose Similar to Figure 5, except that Contact operation obtained when fork
limit switches includes many types of operation is to the left. lever is moved in direction shown and
switches for use in a wide variety of restored to original position when lever
Figure 7 is operated in reverse direction.
applications. Many different contact
arrangements are available. Slow and For clockwise operation. Ratchet type.
When lever is moved to right, contacts Figure 15
snap action contact operating
mechanisms are available. Snap action are operated. Lever is spring return, but Contacts operate in the direction
limit switches are designed to provide contacts remain in the operated shown. Track type limit switch with roller
high snap through force once the position. Next movement of roller lever fork lever. Rollers 22.2 mm (0.875 in.)
mechanism has traveled the required to the right returns the contacts to their diameter hardened steel.
distance. Refer to the table on page original position. This completes cycle
5--12 for limit switch selection. of operation. Lever is adjustable Figure 16
through 360q. Contacts operate when the lever is
Figure 1 moved in either direction. Should only
Figure 8 be used where the link between lever
Lever on right side as illustrated.
Clockwise operation only. Lever can be Similar to Figure 7 except that operation and operating mechanism is short, so
adjusted through 360q. is counterclockwise. that the weight of the connecting
mechanism will not offset the force of
Figure 2 Figure 9 the spring return. Maximum weight of
Contacts are operated in both directions Contacts are operated when fork lever connecting mechanism: 0.5 lb.
of roller lever. With roller on inside, lever is operated in one direction and are
restored to original position when lever Figure 17
is adjustable through 49q either side of
center line. With roller on outside, lever is operated in the reverse direction. Rod Counterweight holds contacts closed.
is adjustable through 360q. or Chain/Stroke Type Actuators not When the hook reaches the upper limit
shown. of its travel, it raises the counterweight
Figure 3 and the weighted lever operates the
Figure 10 contacts. When the hook is lowered the
Similar to Figure 2 except roller lever is
longer for use where more space is Roller lever on right side. Roller contacts are reset.
necessary between limit switch and its 34.9 mm (1.375 in.) in diameter. Lever Figure 18
operating device. The total height from travels through 30q arc. Downward
Similar to Figure 1 except lever is on left
base of limit switch to the end of roller is travel of roller, 33.3 mm (1.312 in.).
side.
181.0 mm (7.125 in.).
Figure 11
Figure 19
Figure 4 Similar to Figure 10, except roller has a
Similar to Figures 5 and 6 except
Same contact operation in either rubber trim, 76.2 mm (3 in.) in diameter.
contacts are arranged for maintained
direction, with roller on either inside or Downward Travel of roller, 42.1 mm
operation. Contacts are actuated when
outside. Starting position of lever is (1.656 in.).
lever is operated in direction shown.
adjustable 43q either side of center line. Contacts are restored when lever is
Figure 12
Figure 5 operated in reverse direction.
Roller lever on right side. Steel roller,
Contact operation is obtained only in 34.9 mm (1.375 in.) in diameter. Lever Figure 20
direction shown. Lever is free to move travel, either direction, 30q.
Similar to Figures 2 and 3 except
in opposite direction, but contacts are contacts are arranged for sequential
not actuated. With roller on inside, Figure 13
operation in either direction. Operation
starting position of lever can be For clockwise operation. Roller, 1.375 is as follows:
adjusted through 128q from extreme left in. (34.9 mm) diameter. Downward Circuit 1 opens at 14q,
position; with roller on outside, the roller linear travel of roller, 50 mm (1.969 in.). Circuit 2 closes at 45q,
lever is adjustable through 360q. Total travel is 55q.
For NEMA 7 & 9 housing, reduce total height by 1.6 mm
(0.063 in.).

5--9
Limit Switches
801
General Purpose
Contact Arrangements and Ratings
A B
3 A, 120V
1.5 A, 240V 1.1 A, 115V
AC DC 0.55 A, 230V
0.75 A, 480V
0.6 A, 600V 0.2 A, 550V
Light Duty
C H N O
Lever Contact
Pos. Pos.
1 2
D
1 Off C O
2 A O O
B O C
Lever Contact
Pos. Pos.
1 2
F 1 R C O
2 Off O O
L O C
Lever Contact
Pos. Pos.
1 2
G 1 R C O
2 Off C C
L O C
K Lever Contact Pos.

Pos. 1 2 3 4
1 3 R C O O C
Off C O C O
2 4
L O C C O
6A, 120V
2.2A, 115V
3A, 240V
AC DC 1.1A, 230V
1.5A, 480V
0.4A, 550V
1.2A, 600V
Standard Duty
Ambient Temperature Range

0}+40qC (+32}+104qF) minimum
temperature based on the absence of
freezing moisture or water.l

Limit Switches
801
General Purpose
Approximate Dimensions [mm (in.)]

73.15 76.2 73.15 98.55
50.8 (2.88) (3.0)
84.1 (2.88) (3.88)
(2.0)
(3.31)
168.4
(6.63)
168.4
(6.63)
117.6
(4.63)
1/2 in.
NPT
Figure 1, 18 Figure 2, 3, 20 Figure 4
73.15 76.2 76.2
(2.88) 73.15 83.3
(3) 119.89 (3)
(2.88) (3.28)
(4.78)
152.4
168.4 168.4 (6)
(6.63) (6.63)
Figure 5, 6, 19 Figure 7, 8 Figure 9

123.95 156.46 130.1 184.9 143.0 177.8
(4.88) (6.16) (5.13) (7.28) (5.63) (7)
162.1
(6.38)
169.9
(6.69)
162.1
(6.38)
Figure 10, 11 Figure 12 Figure 13

134.87 144.53 119.13 176.28
(5.31) (5.69) (4.69) (6.94)
169.9
(6.69)
162.1
(6.38) 162.1
(6.38)
177.8 132.59
(7) (5.22)
Figure 14 Figure 15 Figure 16
155.7 134.1
(6.13) (5.28) 7
2.63s
200.15
(7.88)
Figure 17

5-- 11
Limit Switches
801
General Purpose
Product Selection
Type of Contact Housing Contact Type Force to Travel to Operate Over Travel
Lever Operation Style & Rating Operate (Max.) Contacts (Nominal) (Min.) Cat. No.
NEMA Type 1 Enclosure
A 15.58 N (3.5 lb) 8_ 3_ 801-- ASA11
Figure 1
B 15.58 N (3.5 lb) 3_ 8_ 801-- ASB11
Figure 18 A 15.58 N (3.5 lb) 8_ 3_ 801-- ASA12
Slow Action
Spring Return C 10.0 N (2.25 lb) 30_ 25_ 801-- ASC17
D 10.0 N (2.25 lb) See Figure 20 See Figure 20 801-- ASD17
Figure 2
F 10.0 N (2.25 lb) 25_ 30_ 801-- ASF17
G 10.0 N (2.25 lb) 15_ 40_ 801-- ASG17
C 22.25 N (5.0 lb) 25_ 30_ 801- ASC21
C 37.82 N (8.5 lb) 9_ 40_ 801-- ASC21X
N 22.25 N (5.0 lb) 25_ 30_ 801-- ASN21
Figure 2 N 37.82 N (8.5 lb) 9_ 40_ 801-- ASN21X
O 22.25 N (5.0l bs) 25_ 30_ 801-- ASO21
O 37.82 N (8.5 lb) 9_ 40_ 801-- ASO21X
Roller C 10.0 N (2.25 lb) 30_ 25_ 801-- ASC313
Snap Action H 22.25 N (5.0 lb) 30_ 20_ 801-- ASH22
Spring Return Figure 4
H 31.15 N (7.0 lb) 10_ 43_ 801-- ASH26X
C 17.8 N (4.0 lb) 25_ 30_ 801-- ASC25
C 31.15 N (7.0 lb) 9_ 44_ 801-- ASC25X
Figure 3
N 17.8 N (4.0 lb) 25_ 30_ 801-- ASN25
N 28.92 N (6.5 lb) 9_ 44_ 801-- ASN25X
Figure 5 C 22.25 N (5.0 lb) 25_ 15_ 801-- ASC27
Figure 6 C 17.8 N (4.0 lb) 25_ 15_ 801-- ASC29
Ratchet Type Figure 7 C 28.92 N (6.5 lb) 68_ 12_ 801-- ASC218
Maintained Figure 8 C 22.25 N (5.0 lb) 68_ 12_ 801-- ASC220
Snap Action
Figure 19 C 10.0 N (2.25 lb) 38_ 24_ 801-- AMC211
Maintained
Fork C 15.58 N (3.5 lb) 20.6 mm (0.81 in.) — 801-- CMC21
Rod or Chain Snap Action C 10.0 N (2.25 lb) 20.6 mm (0.81 in.) 20.6mm (0.81 in.) 801-- DMC21
Figure 9
Maintained
Stroke C 20.0 N (4.5 lb) 14.2 mm (0.56 in.) — 801-- EMC21
NEMA Type 4 Enclosure (For Indoor Use)
C 27.81 N (6.25 lb) 26_ 4_ 801-- ASC1411
Figure 10
Slow Action H 27.81 N (6.25 lb) 26_ 4_ 801-- ASH1411
Spring Return Figure 11 C 17.8 N (4.0 lb) 26_ 4_ 801-- ASC1415
Roller
Figure 12 K 17.8 N (4.0 lb) 26_ 4_ 801-- ASK1421
Snap Action
Figure 13 C 17.8 N (4.0 lb) 26.5_ 6_ 801-- ASC2426
Spring Return
Slow Action
Figure 14 C 31.15 N (7.0 lb) 31.8 mm (1.25 in.) — 801-- CMC144
Maintained
Fork
Snap Action
Figure 15 C 28.92 N (6.5 lb) 38.1 mm (1.5 in.) — 801-- CMC2411
Maintained
Rod or Chain Slow Action Figure 16 K 13.35 N (3.0 lb) 26_ 4_ 801-- DSK145
Weight Spring Return Figure 17 C 22.25 N (5.0 lb) 26_ 4_ 801-- FSC148
NEMA Type 7 & 9 Enclosure
C 27.81 N (6.25 lb) 26_ 4_ 801-- ASC1711
Figure 10
Slow Action H 27.81 N (6.25 lb) 26_ 4_ 801-- ASH1711
Spring Return Figure 11 C 17.8 N (4.0 lb) 26_ 4_ 801-- ASC1715
Roller
Figure 12 K 17.8 N (4.0 lb) 26_ 4_ 801-- ASK1721
Snap Action
Figure 13 C 17.8 N (4.0 lb) 26.5_ 6_ 801-- ASC2726
Spring Return
Snap Action
Fork Figure 15 C 28.92 N (6.5 lb) 38.1 mm (1.5 in.) — 801-- CMC2711
Maintained
See table on page 5--10.
See Figure 20 on page 5--9.
The following replacement parts are available: combination lever/weight = B7391, counterweight = Z1997, counterweight cable = B37939.

Limit Switches
802G
Gravity Return
Specifications
Enclosure Rating NEMA 1
Certifications UL Listed, CSA Certified and CE Marked for applicable directives
Slotted Shaft Ambient Temperature [C (F)] 0}110q (32}230q)
to Aid
Adjustment AC Contact Rating (Maximum per Pole, 50 or 60Hz, Same Polarity)
A VA
NEMA Continuous
Rating Max AC Carrying
Designation Voltage Make Break Current Make Break
120 30 3.00 5A 3600 360
240 15 1.50 5A 3600 360
B600 480 7.5 0.75 5A 3600 360
600 6 0.60 5A 3600 360
802G-- GP DC Contact Rating (Maximum per Pole, Same Polarity)

with Steel
Operating Lever Voltage Range Current Rating
115}125 0.4 A
Description 230}250 0.2 A
550}600 0.1 A
The Bulletin 802G is a plug-in gravity
return limit switch designed for
conveyor applications with small or Since the switch shaft can be rotated Features
lightweight moving objects. It has an continuously through 360o, the trip point
extremely low operating torque and S Light operating torque
is adjustable to any angle. This
uses the action of gravity on the lever adjustment is easily made using the S Unique lever arms
arm to reset the contacts. Three unique slots provided at both ends to hold the
lever arms are available for the Bulletin S Trip point adjustable to any angle
shaft, while rotating the lever arm to the
802G in nylon or steel with adjustable desired angle. A clamping pin is used to
lengths. maintain this setting, and a set screw to
hold the rod length adustment. The trip
ATTENTION Bulletin 802T or angle and lever length must be carefully
802MC levers adjusted to provide proper switch
cannot be used on action.
the gravity return Example: CW Operation
limit switch. Teh
gravity return limit
switch requires the
levers on page Lever Travel
5--14.
Trip
Reset
Product Selection
Cat. No.
Torque to Operate Travel to Operate Max Travel to Reset Complete Switch Switch Without
Contact Operation (Max) Contacts (Max) Travel Contacts (Max) Without Lever Lever and Base
0.018 NSm
1 N.O. Adj. from 360q
(2.5 ozSin.) 10q 802G- GP 802G-- GP1
1 N.C. 10q}180q CW or CCW
(without lever)
10q opposite trip direction, 180q in trip direction.

5--13
Limit Switches
802G
Gravity Return

Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes.
45.21
(1.78)
6.35
(0.25) Dia 24.89
(0.98)
19 37.34
(0.75) (1.47)
219.2
(8.63) 20.57
C
11.18 Rod (0.81)
(0.44)
6.35
(0.25) Screwdriver Slot
36.58
(1.44)
12.7
(0.50) 20.57
(0.81)
Operator Head
7.87
(0.31)
59.44
(2.34)
78.99
(3.11)
Conduit
2--#10--32 12.7
14.73 UNF--2B 18.29 (0.50)
2--5.1 (0.201) (0.58) 3.30 (0.72) Dia NPT
Dia. Holes for 29.46 (0.13) 46.24
Front Mtg. (1.16) Deep for (1.84)
41.40 Rear Mtg.
(1.63)
802G-- GP with 802G-- W10 Lever

Approximate Shipping Wt. 1.5lbs (680g)
Modification for Operating Levers

Neon Indicating Light Description Cat. No.
The Bulletin 802G gravity return limit
6.35 mm (0.25 in.) Steel Rod,
switch can be supplied with a neon Adjustable to 219.0 mm 802G-- W10
indicating light. To order, add the letter (8.625 in.) Length
“N” for 120V AC 50/60 Hz or “N5” for
240V AC 50/60 Hz. Example: Catalog 3.18 mm (0.125 in.) Steel
number 802G--GP, becomes catalog Rod, Adjustable to 219.0 mm 802G-- W10A
number 802G--GPN. (8.625 in.) Length
The indicating light is to be internally 6.35 mm (0.25 in.) Nylon

connected by the user to two isolated Rod, Adjustable to 219.0 mm 802G-- W11
(8.625 in.) Length
terminals in the base assembly allowing
complete flexibility in the connection of
the light. Switches with an indicating
light have a contact rating of NEMA
B300.

Limit Switches
802M/802MC
Introduction
operating shaft for lever type switches is characteristics from the top mounting
protected by a three-way seal. Push hole of the Bulletin 802M and 802MC
type switches have a special boot to switch are identical to the Bulletin 802T
prevent oil and other foreign material nonplug-in rotary operated switch line.
from entering the mechanism. A flexible Time saving factory pre-wiring makes
diaphragm seal between the operating the switch economical to use. There is
head and the switch body helps isolate no need to purchase a separate cable
the switch against the ingress of grip or cable because internal wiring by
contaminants. After pre-wiring, the the installer is eliminated. Merely
cover is factory installed and epoxy connect the STO cable to a junction
sealed. box. Since the switch body is
nonmetallic, no ground wire is required
Construction for the switch.
The body and operating head of the
Bulletin 802M and 802MC pre-wired Lever Type Switches
limit switch are constructed from a glass These switches are operated by means
802MC-- AY5 with filled polymer. This material is
802MC-- W1A Lever of a lever which is clamped to a knurled
characterized by excellent dimensional shaft extending from the operating
stability and is resistant to moisture and head. These devices can be easily field
numerous chemicals. converted to clockwise,
Description
The Bulletin 802MC switch also counterclockwise, or both directions of
Bulletin 802M compact pre-wired limit capitalizes on the corrosion-resistant operation without any loose parts. Total
switches are factory sealed to meet the properties of the operating shaft and travel is 86q in either direction.
demanding requirements for NEMA 1, operating head mounting screws, which Operating heads are interchangeable
4, 6P, 13, and IP67 (IEC529) are made of Type 316 stainless steel. and can be mounted in any of four
enclosures. Outstanding features positions 90q apart for maximum
designed into the switch make it ideal The basic switching mechanism has
double-throw, double-break, flexibility. The head is interlocked with
for wet environments and washdown the base unit to resist accidental
applications. snap-action contacts with minimum
contact bounce. The switch is pre-wired shearing.
Bulletin 802MC limit switches are also and factory sealed with “STO” cable. Lever type switches can be equipped
factory sealed against fluid ingress. In An optional mini-type or micro-type with a variety of operating levers: roller
addition, they feature a NEMA 4X receptacle can also be supplied. Refer lever, adjustable roller lever, micrometer
rating, making the 802MC an ideal to Modifications on page 5--27 and adjustment roller lever, rod lever,
solution for washdown applications with 5--33. one-way rod or roller lever and fork
harsh chemicals. lever.
A wide variety of operating heads and Installation
operating levers are available. Push Type Switches
Operating heads can be mounted in Although physically smaller, the Bulletin
four positions, 90q apart. 802M switch can be interchanged with These switches are actuated by means
a Bulletin 802T front mounted lever of a rod or plunger located on the top or
operated switch by using the mounting side of the operating unit. Pushing the
Sealing System foot adaptor included (see dimensions plunger into the head causes the
The cable entrance and wire strands on page 5--18). Cam tracking contacts to operate. Two types of
are epoxy sealed to protect against plungers are available: rod and roller.
liquids entering or wicking into the STO is a common identification of this cable. The more Push type switches are supplied in
switch. The interface between the complete identification of the cable used on the Bulletin spring return construction.
802M is STOOW--A which incorporates an oil resistant
operating head and base is sealed with jacket and conductor insulation, for indoor and outdoor
a chemically resistant O-ring. The use.

5--15
Limit Switches
802M
Pre-Wired—Factory Sealed Switches
Specifications
Enclosure Rating NEMA 1, 4, 6P, 13 and IP67
Pollution Degree 3
Ambient Temperature [C (F)] 0}+80q (+32}+18q) minimum temperature based on the absence of
freezing moisture or water.
AC Contact Rating (Maximum per Pole, 50 or 60Hz, 2 Circuits Same Polarity)
NEMA A Continuous VA
Rating Max Carrying
120 60 6.00 10 7200 720
A600 240 30 3.00 10 7200 720
AC-- 15 480 15 1.50 10 7200 720
600 12 1.20 10 7200 720
Rating Max Carrying
Description Designation Voltage Make Break Current Make Break
The Bulletin 802M compact pre-wired 120 30 3.00 5 3600 360
limit switch is factory sealed to meet the B300
240 15 1.50 5 3600 360
demanding requirements for NEMA 1,
4, 6P and 13 enclosures. Outstanding DC Contact Rating (Maximum per Pole, 2 Circuits Same Polarity)
features designed into the switch make
Continuous
it ideal for wet environments and Nominal Carrying
washdown applications. Voltage A Current (A)
A wide variety of operating heads and 24 1.1 5
operating levers are available.
Operating heads can be mounted in
four positions, 90q apart. The switch is often used in applications Pre-Wired—Factory Sealed
subject to washdowns, streams of
Lever Type x Spring Return page 5--17
coolant, or occasionally submerged in
Applications fluids commonly found on machines or Lever Type Neutral . . . . . . . page 5--19
The Bulletin 802M is designed for dry in industrial processes. This limit switch Position x Spring Return
and wet applications. The superior is being used successfully in High Lever Type x Maintained . . . page 5--20
sealing system has been developed to Water Content Fluid (HWCF) Contact
protect against dust, dirt, and fluids applications. Contact your local Lever Type Sequential x . . page 5--21
normally found in industrial Rockwell Automation sales office or Spring Return
environments. The device has passed Allen--Bradley distributor for
harsh environmental testing such as applications where potentially corrosive Push Type x Spring Return . page 5--22
alternately drenching with a liquid and fluids are of a particular concern. Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . page 5--24
exposing to dust and abrasive grit with
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5--27
the switch operating 250 times per Features
minute. Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5--29
S Pre-wired and factory sealed
S Corrosion-resistant housings
S Corrosion-resistant hardware
(802MC)
S Side rotary, adjustable top and top or
side push styles with and without
rollers
S Double-break fine silver contacts

Limit Switches
802M Lever Type x Spring Return
Range of Operation
Travel to
Operate Contacts
Max Travel Max Travel
D
Travel to D Travel to
Reset Reset
D D
Complete Switch Operator Head Switch Body Only

Without Lever Only
Product Selection
Cat. No.
Torque Travel to Travel to
to Operate Reset Complete Operator Switch
No. of Operate Contacts Max Contacts Switch Head Body
Circuits Lever Movement vs. Contact Operation (Max.) (Max.) Travel (Max.) w/o Lever Only Only
0.34 NSm
15q 6q 802M- AY5 802M- AX
(3 lbSin)
Clockwise or 1 2 1 2 1 2
Counterclockwise 3 4 3 4 3 4 0.56 NSm
8q 4q 802M- HY5 802M- HX
(5 lbSin)
0.34 NSm
15q 6q 802M-- A1Y5 802M-- A1X
(3 lbSin)
2 Clockwise 1 2 1 2 1 2 802M-- XY5
3 4 3 4 3 4 0.56 NSm
8q 4q 802M-- H1Y5 802M-- H1X
(5 lbSin)
0.34 NSm
15q 6q 802M-- A2Y5 802M-- A2X
(3 lbSin)
Counterclockwise 1 2 1 2 1 2
3 4 3 4 3 4 0.56 NSm
8q 4q 802M-- H2Y5 802M-- H2X
(5 lbSin)
86q
0.34 NSm
1 2 1 2 1 2 15q 6q 802M- ATY5 802M- AX
(3 lbSin)
8q 4q 802M-- HTY5 802M-- HX
7 8 7 8 7 8 (5 lbSin)
0.34 NSm
1 2 1 2 1 2 15q 6q 802M-- A1TY5 802M-- A1X
(3 lbSin)
4 Clockwise 3 4 3 4 3 4 802M-- XTY5
5 6 5 6 5 6 0.56 NSm
8q 4q 802M-- H1TY5 802M-- H1X
7 8 7 8 7 8 (5 lbSin)
0.34 NSm
1 2 1 2 1 2 15q 6q 802M-- A2TY5 802M-- A2X
(3 lbSin)
5 6 5 6 5 6 0.56 NSm
8q 4q 802M-- H2TY5 802M-- H2X
7 8 7 8 7 8 (5 lbSin)
The standard length of STO cable is 1.52 m (5 ft). For other lengths see Modifications and Accessories.
Levers—See page 5--130 for a complete listing of operating levers.

Wiring Diagrams—See page 5--24.
Modifications and Accessories—See page 5--27.

5--17
Limit Switches
802M Lever Type x Spring Return

2-Circuit
61.9
(2.44)
54.8 57.9
(2.16) to (2.28)
Adjustment Range
7.8
5.6
(0.31) 19.0 19.0
(0.22)
(0.75) (0.75)
24.2
(0.95)
38.1
(1.5)
6.4
(0.25) Shipping Wt.
19.0
(0.75) 1lb 0.53 kg (3 oz)
57.2 46
(2.25) (1.81)
11 (0.43) Ref.
#16 AWG
4-Conductor
2--5.2 (0.2) Dia. Cable
Mounting Holes 29.4 38.1
5.9
(1.16) (1.5)
(0.23)
41.3
4-Circuit (1.61)
61.9
(2.44)
54.8 57.9
(2.16) to (2.28)
Adjustment Range
7.8
(0.31) 5.6 19.0
19.0
(0.75) (0.22) (0.75)
24.2
(0.95) 38.1
(1.5)
6.3
(0.25) Approximate Shipping Wt.
19.0
(0.75) 0.9 kg (2 lb)
38.1
96.4 (1.5)
(3.8) 72.2 59.5 14.7
(2.84) (2.34) (0.58)
14.7 (0.58) Ref.
#16 AWG
8-Conductor Pilot Light
Cable
29.4 7.5 15.5 38.1
2--5.2 (0.2) Dia. (1.16) (0.3) (0.61) (1.5) 9- and 10-Pin
Mounting Holes Mini-Type Receptacle
44.4
(1.75)
Note: Mounting foot adaptor as shown on page 5--23 is for use with
2-circuit 802M type switches only.


Limit Switches
802M Lever Type Neutral Position x Spring Return
Range of Operation
Travel to Travel to
Operate Operate
Contacts Contacts
Max Travel D Max Travel
D D
Travel to Travel to
Reset Contacts Reset Contacts Complete Switch Operator Head Switch Body Only
Without Lever Only
Product Selection
Torque to Travel to Travel to Cat. No.

Operate (Max) Operate Reset Complete Operator Switch
No. of Contacts Max Contacts Switch w/o Head Body
Circuits Lever Movement vs. Contact Operation CW CCW (Max) Travel (Max) Lever Only Only
1 2 1 2 1 2
3 4 3 4 3 4 7 lbSin) 7.5 lbSin)
4 16q 75q 7q 802M-- NPY5 802M-- NPX 802M-- XNPY5
5 6 5 6 5 6
(0.79 NSm) (0.85 NSm)
7 8 7 8 7 8
Operating lever 802T--W3F should not be used with this switch.
61.9 54.8 57.9

(2.44) (2.16) to (2.28)
Adjustment Range
5.6
7.8 (0.22) 19.0
19.0 (0.75)
(0.31) (0.75)
36.5
(1.44) 38.1
(1.5) Shipping Wt.
6.3
(0.25) 0.90 kg (2 lb)
19.0
(0.75)
108.7
(4.28) 72.2 59.5 14.7
(2.84) (2.34) 14.7 (0.58)
(0.58) #16 AWG
8-Conductor
Cable
38.1
2--5.2 (0.2) Dia. Mini Quick-Disconnect
29.4 7.5 (1.5)
Mounting Holes
(1.16) (0.3)
Note: Mounting foot adaptor as shown on page 5--23 is 44.4
for use with 2-circuit 802M type switches only. (1.75)

Wiring Diagrams—See page 5--24

5--19
Limit Switches
802M Lever Type x Maintained Contact
Range of Operation
Max Travel
Travel to
Reset Contacts
D
D
D
Travel to
Operate
Complete Switch Operator Head Switch Body Only
Contacts
Without Lever Only
Product Selection
Cat. No.
Travel to Travel to
Torque to Operate Reset Complete Operator Switch
No. of Operate Contacts Max Contacts Switch Head Body
Circuits Lever Movement vs. Contact Operation (Max.) (Max.) Travel (Max.) w/o Lever Only Only
2 Clockwise or 1 2 1 2 802M-- AMY5 802M-- XY5

Counterclockwise 3 4 3 4
0.31 NSm
75q 87q 35q 802M-- AMX
Clockwise or (2.75 lbSin)
1 2 1 2
4 Counterclockwise 3 4 3 4 802M-- AMTY5 802M-- XTY5
5 6 5 6
7 8 7 8
From one maintained position to the other.

2-Circuit 4-Circuit
61.9
(2.44) 54.8 57.9
to
61.9 (2.16) (2.28)
(2.44) Adjustment Range
54.8 57.9
(2.16) to (2.28)
7.8 5.6 19.0
Adjustment Range (0.22)
(0.31) (0.75)
7.8 5.6 19.0
(0.31) 19.0 (0.22) 19.0
(0.75)
(0.75) (0.75)
24.2 24.2
(0.95) (0.95)
38.1 38.1
(1.5) (1.5)
6.4 6.3
(0.25) 19.0 (0.25) 19.0
(0.75) (0.75)
96.4
57.2 46 (3.8) 72.2 59.5 14.7
(2.25) (1.81) (2.84) (2.34) (0.58) 14.7
(0.58)
#16 AWG
#16 AWG 8-Conductor
4-Conductor Cable 38.1
2--5.2 (0.2) Dia. 29.4 5.9 Cable 38.1 2--5.2 (0.2) Dia. 7.5 (1.5) 9- and 10-Pin
Mtg. Holes (1.16) (0.23) (1.5) 29.4 (0.3) Mini-Type
Mounting Holes (1.16)
41.3 Receptacle
(1.61) 44.4
Shipping Wt. 0.53 kg (1 lb 3 oz) (1.75) Shipping Wt. 0.90 kg (2 lb)


Limit Switches
802M Lever Type Sequential x Spring Return
Range of Operation
Travel to Operate Travel to Operate

Contacts (Position 1) Contacts (Position 1)
Travel to Operate Travel to Operate

Contacts (Position 2) D Contacts (Position 2)
D
Travel to Reset Travel to Reset
Max Travel
Complete Switch Operator Switch Body Only

Without Lever Head Only
Product Selection — 4-Circuit

Cat. No.
Travel to
To Reset Complete Operator Switch
Position Position Max Position Position Max Contacts Switch w/o Head Body
Lever Movement vs. Contact Operation 1 2 Travel 1 2 Travel (Max.) Lever Only Only
Counterclockwise Clockwise
2 1 1 2 0.79
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 0.9 NSm 10qr 20qr
NSm 88q 4qr 3q 802M-- ASY5 802M-- ASX 802M-- XSY5
3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 (8 lbSin) 3q 3q
5 6 5 6 5 6 5 6 5 6 (7 lbSin)
7 8 7 8 7 8 7 8 7 8
Operating lever 802T-W3F should not be used with this switch.
61.9 54.8 57.9

(2.44) (2.16) to (2.28)
Adjustment Range
5.6
7.8 (0.22) 19.0
19.0 (0.75)
(0.31) (0.75)
36.5
(1.44) 38.1
(1.5)
6.3
(0.25)
19.0
(0.75)
108.7
(4.28) 72.2 59.5 14.7
(2.84) (2.34) 14.7 (0.58) Shipping Wt.
(0.58) #16 AWG 0.90 kg (2 lb)
8-Conductor
Cable
38.1
2--5.2 (0.2) Dia. Mini Quick-Disconnect
29.4 7.5 (1.5)
Mounting Holes
(1.16) (0.3)
Note: Mounting foot adaptor as shown on page 5--23 is 44.4
for use with 2-circuit 802M type switches only. (1.75)


5--21
Limit Switches
802M Push Type x Spring Return
Range of Operation
Travel to
Operate
Contacts
Travel to
Reset Contacts
Adjustable Adjustable
Max Travel Switch Body Top Push Rod Side Push Rod
Only Switch and Head Switch and Head
Top Push Rod Head Side Push Rod Head Top Push Roller Head Side Push Vertical Side Push Horizontal
Roller Head Roller Head
Product Selection
Contact Operation Cat. No.
Travel to Travel to
Force to Operate Reset Operator Switch
No. of Operate Contacts Max Contacts Complete Head Body
Circuits Operator Type Normal Operated (Max) (Max) Travel (Max) Switch Only Only
Top Push Rod 13.3 N 1.45 mm 5.26 mm 0.56 mm 802M-- BY5 802M-- BX
Adjustable Top Push Rod (3 lb) (0.057 in.) (0.207 in.) (0.022 in.) 802M-- BAY5 802M-- BAX
20 N 2.59 mm 5.16 mm 1.14 mm
Side Push Rod 802M-- CY5 802M-- CX
(4.5 lb) (0.102 in.) (0.203 in.) (0.045 in.)
1 2 1 2 14.7 N 1.45 mm 5.26 mm 0.56 mm
2 Top Push Roller 802M- DY5 802M- DX 802M-- XY5
3 4 3 4 (3.3 lb) (0.057 in.) (0.207 in.) (0.022 in.)
Side Push Vertical Roller 802M- KY5 802M- KX
Side Push 20 N 2.59 mm 5.1 mm 1.14 mm 802M-- K1Y5 802M-- K1X
Horizontal Roller (4.5 lb) (0.102 in.) (0.203 in.) (0.045 in.)
Adjustable Side Push Rod 802M-- CAFY5 802M-- CAFX
Top Push Rod 13.3 N 1.45 mm 5.13 mm 0.076 mm 802M-- BTY5 802M-- BX
Adjustable Top Push Rod (3.5 lb) (0.057 in.) (0.202 in.) (0.030 in.) 802M-- BATY5 802M-- BAX
20 N 3.18 mm 5.54 mm 1.14 mm
Side Push Rod 802M-- CTY5 802M-- CX
(4.5 lb) (0.125 in.) (0.218 in.) (0.045 in.)
1 2 1 2 14.7 N 1.45 mm 5.13 mm 0.076 mm
Top Push Roller 3 4 3 4 802M-- DTY5 802M-- DX
4 (3.5 lb) (0.057 in.) (0.202 in.) (0.030 in.) 802M-- XTY5
5 6 5 6
Side Push Vertical Roller 7 8 7 8 802M-- KTY5 802M-- KX
3.18 mm 5.54 mm
Side Push (0.125 in.) (0.218 in.)
20 N 1.14 mm 802M-- K1TY5 802M-- K1X
Horizontal Roller
(4.5 lb) (0.045 in.)
2.59 mm 5.16 mm
Adjustable Side Push Rod 802M-- CAFTY5 802M-- CAFX
(0.102 in.) (0.203 in.)


Limit Switches
802M Push Type x Spring Return
Side Push Types

50.8 19.0
(2) (0.75) 40.45 19.0
(1.59) (0.75)
19.0 Min 61.1
24.2 (0.75) 12.7 (2.41) 19.0
(0.95) 6.4 (0.5) Max 67.5 (0.75)
(0.25) (2.66)
Dia.
Dia.
7.9
7.9
(0.31)
(0.31)
57.2 46.0
(2.25) (1.81) Dia.
Mounting Holes
59.5 5.2 (0.2)
(2.34)
38.1 1.4in
(1.5) 38.1
14.7 (1.5)
(0.58) 802M-- KX Roller Head
29.4 Shipping Wt. 0.53 kg (1 lb 3 oz) 802M-- CX Rod Head
Mounting (1.16) Shipping Wt. 0.53 kg (1 lb 3 38.1
Foot oz) (1.5)
Adaptor 41.3
(1.63) 802M-- CAFX Adjustable Head
Shipping Wt. 0.53 kg (1 lb 3
oz)
Top Push Types

Dia Dia
12.7 19.0 12.7
(0.5) (0.75)
(0.5)
1.4 in
51.6 57.9
(2.03) (2.28) 49.6 43.2 Max 67.5
(1.95) (1.7) 73.8 (2.91) (2.66)
6.4 Min 67.5 Min 61.1
(0.25) (2.66) (2.41)
57.2 46
(2.25) 59.5 (1.81)
(2.34) Dia.
Mounting Holes 38.1
5.2 (0.2) (1.5)
802M-- BX Rod Head
14.7 Shipping Wt. 0.53 kg (1 lb 3 oz)
(0.58)
29.4
Mounting (1.16) 802M-- BAX Adjustable Head
Foot 41.3 Shipping Wt. 0.53 kg (1 lb 3 oz)
Adaptor (1.63)
802M-- DX Roller Head
Shipping Wt. 0.53 kg (1 lb 3 oz)
Note: Mounting foot adaptor as shown above is for use with 2-circuit 802M type switches only.


5--23
Limit Switches
802M Wiring Diagrams for 2-Circuit Models
Cable Models Cable Models with One Indicating Light

(See Applicable Codes and Laws)
Black White
Purple
Black White
Black White
Same
Polarity
Same
Polarity
Same
Polarity Red Orange
Orange
Red
Red Orange
Purple
Light Wired to N.O. (White) Wire Light Wired to N.C. (Orange) Wire
5-Pin Mini-Type Receptacle

“J1” Wiring “J9” Wiring
2 4 5 1
Same Same
Polarity Polarity
5 1 2 4
No Connection No Connection
5-Pin Mini-Type Receptacle with One Indicating Light

2 4 2 4 5 1 5 1
Same Same Same Same

Polarity Polarity Polarity Polarity
5 1 5 1 2 4 2 4
Light Wired to N.O. Light Wired to N.C. Light Wired to N.O. Light Wired to N.C.

Limit Switches
4-Pin Micro-Type Receptacle (DC only) 5-Pin Micro-Type Receptacle (DC only)
“J7” Wiring “J8” Wiring “J5” Wiring “J6” Wiring
2 4 3 1 2 4 5 1
Same Same Same Same

3 1 2 4 5 1 2 4
5-Pin Micro-Type Receptacle with One Indicating Light (DC only)

2 4 2 4 5 1 5 1
Same Same Same Same

5 1 5 1 2 4 2 4

5--25
Limit Switches
Cable Models Neutral Position with Cable Sequential with Cable

(See Applicable Codes and Laws)
Black White Black White Black White
Same Same
Polarity Polarity CCW Same 1st. Transfer
Polarity (Circuit 1 Contacts)
Red Orange Red Orange

Brown Pink Yellow Blue Red Orange
Brown Pink
Same Same CW
Polarity Polarity Open
Same 2nd. Transfer
Polarity (Circuit 2 Contacts)
Yellow Blue Brown Pink
Yellow Blue
Cable Models with Two Indicating Lights

Black White Purple Black White Purple
Same Same
Polarity Polarity
Red Orange Red Orange

Brown Pink Tan Brown Pink Tan
Same Same
Polarity Polarity
Yellow Blue Yellow Blue

Light Wired to N.O. (White) Wire, Light Wired to N.C. (Orange) Wire,
and N.O. (Pink) Wire and N.C. (Blue) Wire
9-Pin Mini-Type Receptacle 10-Pin Mini-Type Receptacle with Two Indicating Lights
3 “J1” Wiring 4 3 4 “J4” Wiring 3 4
Same Same Same

Polarity Polarity Polarity
1 2 1 2 1 2
8 6 7 6 7 6
Same Same Same

Polarity Polarity Polarity
9 5 9 5 9 5
No Connection
Light Wired to N.O. Light Wired to N.C.

Limit Switches
802M Modifications
24V DC Switches 5-Pin Mini-Type Receptacle 10-Pin Mini-Type Receptacle

All two-circuit 802M limit switches are (2-Circuit Models Only) (4-Circuit Models with 2
available with silver-nickel contacts Indicating Lights Only)
rated for 24V DC applications. To order To order a Bulletin 802M pre-wired limit
a switch rated for 24V DC use, insert switch with a 10-pin mini connector and
the letter Z before the cable or two indicating lights, replace the Y5 in
connector designation. Example: the cat. no. with the suffix J4. Maximum
802M--AZY5 is a 24V DC version of the voltage rating for this receptacle is 250V
802M--AY5. The use of the 24V DC AC. Also, specify the indicating lights
micro connector option or 24V DC per the table on page 5--28.
indicating light option require the switch
be rated for 24V DC operation. Example: Cat. No. 802M--ATY5 with
mini-connector and (2) 120V AC
indicating lights wired to one side of
Extended Cable Lengths each N.O. contact would be Cat. No.
802M with Mini-Type Receptacle
The factory installed type STO cable is 2-Circuit 802M--ATJ4L1F.
normally supplied in 1.52 m (5 ft) An appropriate female connector with
lengths. Extended cable lengths are To order a Bulletin 802M pre-wired limit cable (889N--F10AF--2) is available on
available in multiples of four feet. To switch with a 5-pin mini connector in page 8--14 in Connection Systems.
order, replace the suffix Y5 in the cat. place of the 1.52 m (5 ft) of “STO”
no. with the appropriate suffix from the cable, replace the Y5 in the cat. no. with 4-Pin Micro-Type Receptacle
table below. Example: To order a lever the suffix J1 or J9 depending upon the
wiring configuration required. Maximum
(2-Circuit 24V DC Models Only)
type two-circuit spring return switch with
1.83 m (8 ft) of STO cable the cat. no. voltage rating for this receptacle is 250V
would be 802M--AY8. AC.
An appropriate female connector with
Additional Cable Length cable (889N--F5AFC--6F) is available
Cat. Number
on page 8--4 in Connection Systems.
Modification Suffix
1.83 m (8 ft) Cable Y8
3.66 m (12 ft) Cable Y12 9-Pin Mini-Type Receptacle
4.78 m (16 ft) Cable Y16
(4-Circuit Models without
Indicator Lights Only)
802M with Micro-Type
Receptacle—2-Circuit
To order a Bulletin 802M pre-wired limit

switch with a 4-pin micro connector in
place of the 1.52 m (5 ft) of “STO”
cable, replace the Y5 in the cat. no. with
the suffix J7 or J8 depending upon the
wiring configuration required. This
option requires that the switch is rated
24V DC.
802M with Mini-Type Receptacle cable (889D--F4AC--2) is available on
4-Circuit page 8--16 in Connection Systems.
To order a Bulletin 802M pre-wired limit

A 5-pin, 9-pin or 10-pin plug-in receptacle is supplied to 5-Pin Micro-Type Receptacle
switch with a 9-pin mini connector in
facilitate retrofitting existing installations. The normal
place of the 1.52 m (5 ft) of STO cable, (2-Circuit 24V DC Models Only)
ground wire pin is not required and is not connected in-
side the switch. replace the Y5 in the cat. no. with the To order a Bulletin 802M pre-wired limit
STO is a common identification of this cable. The more suffix J1. Maximum voltage rating for switch with a 5-pin micro connector in
complete identification of the cable used on the Bulletin this receptacle is 250V AC. place of the 1.52 m (5 ft) of “STO”
802M is STOOW--A which incorporates an oil resistant cable, replace the Y5 in the cat. no. with
jacket and conductor insulation, for indoor and outdoor An appropriate female connector with
use. cable (889N--F9AF--2) is available on the suffix J5 or J6 depending upon the
page 8--14 in Connection Systems. wiring configuration required. This
option requires that the switch is rated
24V DC.
cable (889D--F5AC--2) is available on
page 8--16 in Connection Systems.

5--27
Limit Switches
802M Modifications
Indicating Lights LED Indicating Lights

Cat. No.
Voltage Wired to Suffix
N.O. Contact LF
24V DC
N.C. Contact LC
120V AC N.O. Contact L1F

50-- 60Hz N.C. Contact L1C
Neon Indicating Lights
Cat. No.
120V AC N.O. Contact NF

802M with Indicating Light 802M with Indicating Lights 50-- 60Hz N.C. Contact NC
2-Circuit 4-Circuit
240V AC N.O. Contact N5F
2-Circuit—Bulletin 802M pre-wired limit 4-Circuit—Bulletin 802M pre-wired limit 50-- 60Hz N.C. Contact N5C
switches can be supplied with an switches can be supplied with 2
indicating light which is wired to one indicating lights wired to one side of
side of either the N.O. or N.C. contact. each N.O. or N.C. contact of the Fitting for Liquid-Tight
The second lead of the light is available 4-circuit contact block. Second leads
Flexible Metal Conduit
as a fifth conductor for wiring flexibility. from each light are available as ninth
See pages 5--24 through 5--25 for and tenth conductors for wiring 802M 2-circuit switches can be
wiring diagrams. flexibility. See page 5--26 for wiring obtained provided with a fitting for
diagram. liquid-tight flexible metal conduit
To order, add the appropriate suffix
(flexible metal conduit not provided) and
listed in the table to the right to the cat. To order, add the appropriate suffix
a pigtail for wiring. Add the following
no. Example: Cat. No. 802M--AY5 with listed in the table to the right to the cat.
suffix to the cat. no. (dashes indicate
a 120V AC LED indicating light wired to no.
pigtail length):
one side of the N.O. contact would be Example: Cat. No. 802M--ATY5 with
Cat. No. 802M--AY5L1F. GS_ straight--out fitting
120V AC LED indicating lights wired to
GF_ front oriented 90_ elbow fitting
Example: Cat. No. 802M-AY5 with one side of each N.C. contact would be
GL_ left oriented 90_ elbow fitting
mini-connector and 120V AC indicating Cat. No. 802M--ATY5L1C.
GB_ back oriented 90_ elbow fitting
light wired to one side of the N.O. 54.8
to
57.9 GR_ right oriented 90_ elbow fitting.
contact would be Cat. No. (2.16) (2.28)
802M--AJ1L1F. Adjustment Example: GS5=5 foot long pigtail.
5.6 Range Additional cable length over 1.5 m (5 ft)
(0.22) 19.0 is available in multiples of 1.2 m (4 ft).
(0.75)
38.1
(1.5)
12.7
(0.5)
Single
Pilot Light
6.4 Dual
Mini Pilot Light
(0.25) Connector Mini
15.5 (0.61) 38.1 Connector
(1.5)
See wiring diagrams page 5--24}5--26.

Requires the switch be rated for 24V DC operation.

Limit Switches
802M Accessories
Adaptor Foot Rear Mounting Adaptor Kit

To mount a 2-circuit 802M in the same For rear mounting of 2-circuit or 4-circuit
1.16 in. x 2.34 in. mounting hole pattern Bulletin 802M pre-wired limit switch (not
as an 802T, an adaptor foot is required suitable for use on Bulletin 802MC).
and is included with each 802M as Kit includes mounting plate and two
shipped. This accessory is made of screws for mounting adaptor plate to
steel and is chromate plated to resist switch. To mount to surface from rear
corrosion. To obtain replacement use two #10--32 screws. Select proper
adaptor feet, order Cat. No. screw length to pass through adaptor
40246--008--02. plate without bottoming against back of
limit switch.
Order Cat. No. 802M--N1.
38.9 3.2
6.4 (1.53) (0.13)
(0.25) 4.8 29.4 0.8
(0.19) (1.16) (0.03)
46
(1.81)
59.5
(2.34)
72.2
(2.84)
#10--32 UNF--2B
6--Places
Approximate Shipping Wt. 0.2 kg (8 oz)

5--29
Limit Switches
802MC
Corrosion-Resistant Pre-Wired—Factory Sealed Switches
Specifications
Enclosure Rating NEMA 1, 4X, 6P, 13 and IP66/67 (IEC529)
Pollutions Degree 3
Ambient Temperature [C (F)] 0}+80q (+32}+180q)
Rating Carrying
120 60 6.00 10 7200 720
A600 240 30 3.00 10 7200 720
AC-- 15 480 15 1.50 10 7200 720
600 12 1.20 10 7200 720
DC Contact Rating (Maximum per Pole, 2 Circuits Same Polarity)
Description Continuous
The Bulletin 802MC is a pre-wired limit Nominal Carrying
Voltage A Current
switch especially designed to provide
additional corrosion protection in wet or 24 1.1 5
dry locations commonly found in Minimum temperature is based on the absence of freezing moisture or water.
industrial process. By using a polymeric
enclosure and Type 316 stainless steel
for the exposed metal parts, the Bulletin Applications Corrosion-Resistant Pre-Wired
802MC provides a tougher defense
against environmental contaminants to Typical examples of Bulletin 802MC Lever Type x Spring Return page 5--31
provide the user with more dependable applications are plating facilities, Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . page 5--32
operation and longer lasting chemical or fertilizer plants, meat
packing plants, dairies, breweries and Modifications and . . . . . . . . . page 5--33
performance. In addition, this switch is Accessories
factory sealed and is particularly other processing industries, where
effective in applications where it may be equipment might be hosed down
subjected to dust, dirt, streams of regularly with cleaning solutions.
liquids or occasionally submerged in
fluids. Features
S Pre-wired and factory sealed
S Corrosion resistant
S Submersible

Limit Switches
802MC Lever Type x Spring Return
Range of Operation
Travel to
Operate Contacts
D
Reset Contacts Reset Contacts
D D
Complete Switch Operator Base Only

Without Lever Head Only
Product Selection
Cat. No.
Torque Travel to Travel to
to Operate Reset Complete
No. of Operate Contacts Max Contacts Switch w/o Operator Switch
Circuits Lever Movement vs. Contact Operation (Max) (Max) Travel (Max) Lever Head Only Only
Clockwise or 1 2 1 2 1 2 802MC- AY5 802MC- AX

0.34 NSm
2 Clockwise 1 2 1 2 1 2 15q 86q 6q 802MC-- A1Y5 802MC-- A1X 802MC-- XY5
(3 lbSin)
3 4 3 4 3 4
Counterclockwise 1 2 1 2 1 2 802MC-- A2Y5 802MC-- A2X

3 4 3 4 3 4
The standard length of STO cable is 1.52 m (5 ft). For other lengths, see Modifications and Accessories.
61.9
(2.44)
54.8 57.9
(2.16) to (2.28)
Adjustment Range
7.8 5.6
(0.31) 19.0 (0.22) 19.0
(0.75) (0.75)
24.2
(0.95) 38.1
(1.5)
6.4
(0.25) 19.0
(0.75)
38.1
(1.5)
57.2 46
(2.25) (1.81)
#16 AWG Neon Lamp

4-Conductor
5.2 (0.2) Dia. 29.4 Cable 38.1
5.9
Mounting Holes (2) (1.16) (0.23) (1.5)
41.3
(1.61)


5--31
Limit Switches
802MC Wiring Diagrams
Cable Models Cable Models with Indicating Light

(See Applicable Codes and Laws) Black White
Purple
Black White
Black White
Same
Polarity
Same
Polarity
Same
Polarity Red Orange
Red Orange
Red Orange
Purple
Light Wired to N.O. (White) Wire Light Wired to N.C. (Orange) Wire
5-Pin Mini-Type Receptacle

2 4 5 1
Same Same
Polarity Polarity
1 2 4
5-Pin Mini-Type Receptacle with Indicating Light

2 4 2 4 5 1 5 1
Same Same Same Same

5 1 5 1 2 4 2 4
Light Wired to N.O. Light Wired to N.C. Light Wired to N.O. Light Wired to N.C.

Limit Switches
802MC Modifications
Cable Length
The factory installed pre-wired, type
STO cable is normally supplied in
1.52 m (5 ft) lengths. Extended cable
lengths are available in multiples of 4
feet. To order, replace the suffix Y5 in
the cat. no. with the appropriate suffix
from the table below. Example: To order
a lever type spring return switch with
1.83 m (8 ft) of STO cable the cat. no.
would be 802MC--AY8.
Cat. No.
Neon Indicating Light 5-Pin Mini-Type Receptacle Modification Suffix
1.83 m (8 ft) Cable Y8
3.66 m (12 ft) Cable Y12
Indicating Light 5-Pin Mini-Type Receptacle—
2-Circuit Contact Block 4.78 m (16 ft) Cable Y16
Bulletin 802MC pre-wired limit switches
can be supplied with an indicating light To order a Bulletin 802MC pre-wired
wired to one side of either the N.O. or limit switch with a 5-pin mini connector 2-Circuit 24V DC Switches
N.C. contact. The second lead of the in place of the 1.52 m (5 ft) of “STO”
light is available as a fifth conductor for cable, replace the Y5 in the cat. no. with All 2-circuit 802MC limit switches are
wiring flexibility. the suffix J1 or J9 depending upon the available with silver-nickel contacts and
wiring configuration required. Maximum rated for 24V DC applications. To order
To order, add the appropriate suffix a switch rated for 24V DC use, insert
listed in the table below to the cat. no.. voltage rating for this receptacle is
250V AC. the letter Z before the cable or
Example: Cat. No. 802MC--AY5 with a connection designation. Example:
120V AC LED indicating light wired An appropriate female connector with 802MC--AZY5 is a 24V DC version of
across the N.O. contact would be Cat. cable (889N--F5AFC--6F) is available the 802MC--AY5. The use of the 24V
No. 802MC--AY5L1F. on page 8--4 in Connection Systems. DC pilot light option requires the switch
be rated for 24V DC operation.
LED Indicating Light
Cat. No.
38.1
N.O. Contact LF (1.5)
24V DC 12.7
N.C. Contact LC
(0.5)
120V AC N.O. Contact L1F
LED Indicating
50-- 60 Hz N.C. Contact L1C Light
Neon Indicating Light 3.8 Mini Connector
Cat. No. (0.15)
120V AC N.O. Contact NF
50-- 6 0Hz N.C. Contact NC
240V AC N.O. Contact N5F
50-- 60 Hz N.C. Contact N5C
Requires switch to be rated for 24V DC operation.

A 5-pin mini-type receptacle is supplied to facilitate retro-
fitting existing installations. The normal ground wire pin is
not required and is not connected inside the switch.
STO is a common identification of this cable. The more
complete identification of the cable used on the Bulletin
802M is STOOW--A which incorporates an oil resistant
jacket and conductor insulation, for indoor and outdoor
use.

5--33
Limit Switches
802R
Sealed Contact Switches
Lever Type Switches Wobble Stick and Cat Whisker

These switches can be equipped with Type Switches
any one of seven different operating Both switches are actuated by a rod or
levers: roller lever, adjustable roller wire extending from the top of the
lever, micrometer adjustment roller operating head. Moving the rod through
lever, rod lever, one-way rod or roller a specified angle in any direction
lever and fork lever. These can be used causes the contacts to operate. All
interchangeably on all lever type wobble stick and cat whisker switches
switches except the low operating are supplied with spring return
force switch, which requires the lever construction only.
indentified by Cat. No. 802T--W5.
The micrometer adjustment roller lever, Ambient Temperature Range
Cat. No. 802T--W6, is designed
Bulletin 802R limit switches, except
especially for installations where the
devices with wobble stick or cat whisker
position of the roller is a critical factor.
Sealed 802R-- AF operators, have an ambient
This lever has a pivoted roller which
Contact (cover removed) temperature range of --29}+121qC
can be turned laterally. After clamping
Switch with 802T-- W1 Lever (--20}+250qF). Wobble stick and cat
the lever to the switch shaft, the position
whisker limit switches are rated from
of the roller can be precisely adjusted
--18}+54qC (0}+130qF).
Description through an arc of 7.5q on either side of
Note: Temperature ranges below 0qC
the center or straight-line position.
This sealed contact limit switch features (+32qF) are based on the absence of
a rugged single contact, hermetically freezing moisture or water.
sealed in a glass envelope, that has Push Type Switches
excellent contact reliability even in Switches in this category are actuated Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc.
contaminated atmospheres. The switch by means of a rod or plunger located on Listed, CSA Certified
is Programmable Controller compatible the top or side of the operating head.
(24V and above) and is pilot duty rated Pushing the plunger into the head These switches are listed by
NEMA B600 for AC and NEMA P300 for causes the contacts to operate. Three Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc. for use
DC as shown on page 5--35. The types of plungers are available: push in Class 1, Division 2, Groups A, B, C
enclosure is NEMA Type 13. rod, adjustable push rod and steel push and D hazardous locations as defined
roller. by the National Electrical Code.

Limit Switches
802R
Specifications
Enclosure Rating NEMA 13
Approvals UL Listed and CSA Certified
Ambient Temperature [C (F)] - 29}+121q (-- 20}+250q)
Exception: Wobble stick and cat whisker devices are rated from
- 18}+54q (0}+130q)
AC Contact Rating (Maximum per Pole, 50 or 60 Hz, Same Polarity)

Rating Max Carrying
120 30 3.00 5 3600 360
802R-- AF 240 15 1.50 5 3600 360
B600
480 7.5 0.75 5 3600 360
Description 600 6 0.60 5 3600 360
This sealed contact limit switch features DC Contact Rating (Maximum per Pole, Same Polarity)
a rugged single contact, hermetically
sealed in a glass envelope, that has NEMA Rating Designation Voltage Range Current Rating
excellent contact reliability even in 115}125 1.1 A
contaminated atmospheres. The switch P300
230}250 0.55 A
is Programmable Controller compatible
(24 volts and above) and is pilot duty
rated NEMA B600 for AC and NEMA Features Sealed Contact
P300 for DC as shown to the right. The
enclosure is NEMA Type 13. S PLC compatible Lever Type x Spring Return page 5--36
S High contact reliability in Lever Type x Maintained . . . page 5--37
contaminated atmospheres Contact
Push Type x Spring Return . page 5--38
Wobble Stick and . . . . . . . . page 5--39
Cat Whisker x Spring Return
Modifications and . . . . . . . . . page 5--39
Accessories

5--35
Limit Switches
802R Lever Type x Spring Return
Range of Operation
Travel to
Operate Contact Travel to
Operate Contact No Contact
Max Travel D Max Travel Movement
Max Travel D
D D D
D
Travel to
Travel to Travel to
Reset Contact
Reset Contact Reset Contact
Lever Operation with Lever Operation When “One-Way”

Standard Levers Levers 802T--W7 or W8 Are Used
802R-- AF Without Lever 802R-- ALFW5
Product Selection—Standard and Low Operating Torque Models

Travel to Travel to
Torque to Operate Max Reset Contact Contact
Lever Movement Operate (Max.) Contact (Max.) Travel (Max.) Type Cat. No.
N.O. 802R- AF
0.34 N.m (3 lbSin) 16q 42q 9q
Clockwise or N.C. 802R-- AC
Counterclockwise N.O. 802R-- HF
53q
N.C. 802R-- HC
N.O. 802R-- H1F
Clockwise 0.51 N.m (4.5 lbSin) 7q 3.5q
N.C. 802R-- H1C
50q
N.O. 802R-- H2F
Counterclockwise
N.C. 802R-- H2C
Clockwise N.O. 802R-- L1F
Lever cannot move counterclockwise N.C. 802R-- L1C
0.45 N.m (4 lbSin) 20q 91q 11q
Counterclockwise N.O. 802R-- L2F
Lever cannot move clockwise N.C. 802R-- L2C
Clockwise or N.O. 802R-- ALFW5
Counterclockwise N.C. 802R-- ALCW5
Clockwise 0.09 NSm N.O. 802R-- AL1FW5
22q 43q 12q
Lever cannot be moved counterclockwise (0.78 lbSin) N.C. 802R-- AL1CW5
Counterclockwise N.O. 802R-- AL2FW5
Lever cannot be moved clockwise N.C. 802R-- AL2CW5
These low operating force limit switches can only be supplied with the catalog number 802T- W5 rod lever. The rod can easily be formed to meet special application requirements. The
contact is restored to its normal position when pressure on the rod is released.

55.63
19 (2.22)
(0.75) 45.21 16.76
7.11 (1.78) (0.66)
(0.28)
38.1
6.35
(1.5)
(0.25)
12.7
(0.5)
Standard Switch with 802T-- W1 Lever
59.44 Operating Shipping Wt. 0.35 kg (12.5 oz)
(2.34) 72.14 Head
(2.84)
Conduit
2--5.4 (0.213), 14.73 21.34
Dia. Holes for 29.46 (0.58) 0.5 in. Dia. (0.84)
Front Mtg. (1.16) NPT Note: Details regarding wiring Allen-Bradley
45.21 Limit Switches to Allen-Bradley PLCs
38.86 (1.78) can be found in publications
(1.53) 802T--4.0, 4.1, 4.2, and 4.3.


Limit Switches
802R Lever Type x Maintained Contact
Range of Operation
Max Travel
Travel to
Reset Contact
D
D
D
Travel to
Operate Contact
Switch Without Lever
Product Selection
Torque to Travel to Operate Max Travel to Reset Contact
Lever Movement Operate (Max) Contact (Max) Travel (Max) Contact Type Cat. No.
Clockwise or 0.25 NSm N.O. 802R-- AMF

70q 84q 35q
Counterclockwise (2.25 lbSin) N.C. 802R-- AMC
55.63
(2.22)
19 45.21 16.76
(0.75) 7.11 (1.78) (0.66)
(0.28)
38.1
(1.5) 6.35
(0.25)
12.7
(0.5)
72.14
(2.84) Operating
59.44 Head
(2.34)
Conduit
2--5.4 (0.213), 14.73 21.34
Dia. Holes for (0.58) (0.84)
Front Mtg. 29.46 0.5 in. Dia.
(1.16) NPT
38.86 45.21
(1.53) (1.78)
Standard Switch with 802T-- W1 Lever

Shipping Wt. 0.35 kg (12.5 oz)


5--37
Limit Switches
802R Push Type x Spring Return
Range of Operation
Travel to
Operate
Travel to Contact
Reset Contact
Max. Travel
Top Adjustable Side Top Side
Push Rod Top Push Rod Push Rod Push Roller Push Roller
Product Selection
Force to Travel to Operate Max Travel to Reset
Operator Type Operate (Max) Contact (Max) Travel Contact (Max) Contact Type Cat. No.
N.O. 802R-- BF
Top Push Rod
15.6 N 1.75 mm 5.13 mm 0.71 mm N.C. 802R-- BC
(3.5 lb) (0.069 in.) (0.202 in.) (0.028 in.) N.O. 802R-- BAF
Adjustable Top Push Rod
N.C. 802R-- BAC
20.0 N 3.18 mm 5.54 mm 1.45 mm N.O. 802R-- CF
Side Push Rod
(4.5 lb) (0.125 in.) (0.218 in.) (0.057 in.) N.C. 802R-- CC
15.6 N 1.75 mm 5.13 mm 0.71 mm N.O. 802R-- DF
Top Push Roller
(3.5 lb) (0.069 in.) (0.202 in.) (0.028 in.) N.C. 802R-- DC
N.O. 802R-- KF
Side Push Vertical Roller
20.0 N 3.18 mm 5.54 mm 1.45 mm N.C. 802R-- KC
(4.5 lb) (0.125 in.) (0.218 in.) (0.057 in.) N.O. 802R-- K1F
Side Push Horizontal Roller
N.C. 802R-- K1C
72.14 7.87
(2.84) 9.65 (0.31)
Operating (0.38) Dia.
Head Dia.
59.44
(2.34)
67.56
Conduit (2.66) Max
43.69
2--5.4 (0.213), 14.73 21.34 (1.72)
(0.58) 61.21
Dia. Holes for (0.84) (2.41) Min
Front Mtg. 0.5 in. Dia.
29.46 NPT
(1.16)
38.86 45.21 Z-- 36615
40182-- 022-- 52
(1.53) (1.78) Top Push Rod Head
Shipping Wt. 0.12 kg (4.25 oz) Adjustable Top
Standard Switch Push Rod Head
Shipping Wt. 0.35 kg (12.5 oz) Shipping Wt. 0.12 kg (4.25 oz)
33.27 12.7 33.27
36.83 46.74
(1.31) (0.5) (1.31)
(1.45) (1.84)
51.56
(1.72)
7.87 Dia.
12.7 (0.31) 12.7
12.7
(0.5) (0.5) (0.5)
Z-- 36616 Z-- 36622
Z-- 36618
Side Push Rod Head Side Push Vertical Roller Head
Top Push Roller Head
Shipping Wt. 0.12 kg (4.25 oz) Shipping Wt. 0.12 kg (4.25 oz)

Limit Switches
802R Wobble Stick and Cat Whisker x Spring Return
‘zl
Range of Operation
Travel to
Operate Contact
D Max Travel
D
D
Travel to
Reset Contact
Wire Wobble Cat Whisker

Stick
Product Selection
Torque to Travel to Operate Max Travel to Reset Contact
Operator Type Operate (Max.) Contact (Max.) Travel Contact (Max.) Type Cat. No.
0.51 NSm N.O. 802R-- WS1F
Wire Wobble Stick 11q 11q 5q
(4.5 lbSin) N.C. 802R-- WS1C
0.06 NSm N.O. 802R-- CWF
Wire Cat Whisker 25q 25q 14q
(8 ozSin) N.C. 802R-- CWC
These switches should be mounted in such a way that the wobble or cat whisker will not be deflected beyond the “Maximum Travel” position. This is to avoid excessive backlash, which could
cause undesirable repetition of contact action.
Ambient temperature --18_C}54_C (0_F}130_F).
1.98
(0.078)
1.83 (0.072) Dia.
O.D. Nylon Tubing
127 317.5
(5) (12.5)
5.59
(0.22)
Z-- 35607 Z-- 35617
Cat Whisker Head Wire Wobble Stick Head
Shipping Wt. 0.3 kg (1 oz) Shipping Wt. 0.17 kg (6 oz)
Modification for Conduit Seal Cat. No. 802T--N3 Special Conduit Lock Nut
Transparent Cover A synthetic rubber conduit seal is Cat. No. 802T--X4
Switches can be furnished with a available to protect the conduit opening This option, a “Tru-Seal” lock nut with
gasketed, transparent plastic cover. against the ingress of oil into the wiring threaded PTFE insert, is a valuable
This modification enables the electrician compartment. Each wire hole in the seal accessory for any Bulletin 802R which
to inspect terminal wiring without has a thin inner wall which is pierced is connected by means of conduit.
removing the switch cover. To order, when a wire is passed through. Thus,
add the letter Z to the cat. no. of the any unused opening remains sealed.
standard switch. Example: Cat. No.
802R--DF becomes Cat. No.
802R--DFZ.

5--39
Limit Switches
802T
Introduction
Rugged, Dependable available. The contacts are snap-acting

Contact Block with high snap-through force resulting in
minimum contact rebound.
The contacts used in Bulletin 802T
switches are snap-action type with high Wobble Stick and Cat Whisker
snap-through force resulting in Type Switches
minimum contact rebound. Double
break, fine silver contacts are Both switches are actuated by a rod or
electrically independent, but cannot be wire extending from the top of the
used on opposite polarities. operating head. Moving the rod through
a specified angle in any direction
Easy Mounting and Wiring causes the contacts to operate. All
wobble stick and cat whisker switches
Each switch base has four mounting are supplied with spring return
holes: two “through” holes for front construction only. The contacts are
mounting and two tapped holes in the snap-action type with high snap-through
back for rear mounting. The pressure force resulting in minimum contact
plate type terminals on the contact rebound.
block face to the front of the switch and
Plug-in Style NonPlug-in Style have ample wiring space around them. Dual Switches
802T-- AP with 802T-- A with The switch conduit opening is a 1/2-inch
Lever Lever threaded pipe tap in the bottom of the The dual switch is actually two limit
housing. switches which function independently
but have a co mm on enclosure. These
Description
Direct Opening Action Position switches are used for installations
Bulletin 802T limit switches are ideal for Interlock Switches where two switches would be mounted
applications in which heavy duty pilot side by side. There is a saving on
ratings, small size, a high degree of Bulletin 802T Direct Opening Action installation time and fittings (see page
versatility and a rugged NEMA Type 4 limit switches have been designed for 5--71).
and 13 oiltight construction are use in control reliable applications and
desirable. An important factor in the safety applications per ISO 14119. Plug-in Switches
automation of industry, these limit Direct Opening Action assures that the Plug-in style limit switches can reduce
switches are being applied extensively normally closed contacts open when costly downtime by eliminating the need
on conveyor systems, transfer the limit switch is actuated. This for rewiring switches. The head and
machines, automatic turret lathes, opening will occur even in the event of switch body can be replaced without
milling and boring machines, radial a contact weld condition, up to 10 disturbing the wiring chamber in the
drills, and many other types of modern, Newtons. base. These units, featuring a castle
high speed production equipment. lock head design, snap-action contacts
Lever Type Switches and reliable plug-in connection are
High Degree of Versatility available in 2-circuit or 4-circuit
These switches are operated by means
Bulletin 802T limit switches can be of a lever which is clamped to a knurled construction. Plug-in style limit switches
mounted in any position, with operating shaft extending from the operating are listed on page 5--41.
heads that can be rotated and fastened head.
in any one of four positions 90q apart. Four-Circuit
Most operating levers are Lever type switches can be equipped NonPlug-in Switches
with a variety of operating levers: roller
interchangeable and can be rotated and These switches contain two single pole
clamped in any position through 360q. lever, adjustable roller lever, micrometer
adjustment roller lever, rod lever, single throw contact blocks (a total of
Accessories can be added to switches two N.O. and two N.C. contacts)
already in the field. one-way rod or roller lever and fork
lever. These can be used mounted in a co mm on enclosure. The
NEMA Type 4, 13 and 6P interchangeably on all lever type blocks are mounted one above the
switches except the low operating other in the vertical limit switch
Oiltight Construction construction, or side by side in the
force switch.
802T limit switches feature NEMA Type horizontal construction. Switch plungers
4 and 13 construction with synthetic Push Type Switches are mechanically coupled in both
rubber seals to protect the operating These switches are actuated by means constructions. When actuated, contacts
parts against entry of oil, dust, in both blocks are operated. These
of a rod or plunger located on the top or
abrasives, water and coolant, within the side of the operating head. Pushing the switches in both types of construction
limits of NEMA-specified tests. plunger into the head causes the are listed on page 5--54.
Plug-in lever type except low-torque models.
contacts to operate. Two types of General Information
plungers are available: rod type and
steel roller. Side push rod switches can Plug-in Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5--41
be supplied in spring return or NonPlug-in Style . . . . . . . . . page 5--54
maintained contact constructions. An
adjustable length top push rod is also Operating Levers
Lever Selection . . . . . . . . . page 5--130

Limit Switches
802T
Plug-in Style Oiltight Switches
Specifications
Enclosure Rating NEMA 4, 13, 6P and IP67
Pollution Degree 3
Certifications UL Listed, CSA Certified CE Marked for applicable directives
Ambient Temperature [C (F)] - 18}+110q (0}+230q)
Exception: Wobble stick and cat whisker devices are rated from
- 18}+54q (0}+130q)
AC Contact Rating (Maximum per Pole, 50 or 60 Hz, 2 Circuits Same Polarity)

Rating Max Carrying
120 60 6.00 10 7200 720
A600 240 30 3.00 10 7200 720

AC-- 15 480 15 1.50 10 7200 720
Description
600 12 1.20 10 7200 720
Bulletin 802T limit switches are ideal for
applications in which heavy duty pilot 120 30 3.00 5 3600 360
ratings, small size, a high degree of B600 240 15 1.50 5 3600 360
versatility and a rugged NEMA Type 4, AC-- 15 480 7.5 0.75 5 3600 360
13 and 6P construction are desirable.
600 6 0.60 5 3600 360
An important factor in the automation of
industry, these limit switches are being AC Contact Rating (Maximum per Pole, 50 or 60 Hz, 4 Circuits Same Polarity)
applied extensively on conveyor
systems, transfer machines, automatic
turret lathes, milling and boring Rating Max Carrying
machines, radial drills, and many other
types of modern, high speed production 120 60 6.00 10 7200 720
equipment. A300
240 30 3.00 10 7200 720
A wide variety of operating heads and
operating levers are available. DC Contact Rating (Maximum per Pole)
Operating heads can be mounted in Circuits Voltage Range Current Rating
four positions, 90q apart. 115-- 125 0.4 A
Features 2 230-- 250 0.2 A
S Front mount for simplified mounting 550-- 600 0.1 A
115-- 125 0.4 A
S Plug-in style for ease of wiring 4
230-- 250 0.2 A
S Side rotary, wobble stick, cat whisker,
adjustable top and top or side push Plug-in Style
styles with and without rollers
Lever Type x Spring Return page 5--42
S Quick mode change to clockwise Standard and Low Operating Torque
and counterclockwise operation only Models
S Castle lock head design for high Lever Type x Maintained . . page 5--44
durability Contact and Neutral Position
Push Type x Spring Return . page 5--45
Wobble Stick and Cat . . . . . page 5--47
Whisker x Spring Return
Accessories
Plug-in lever type except low-torque models. 802T Operating Levers
Temperature range below 0 _C (+32 _F) is based on the absence of freezing moisture or water.
See page 5--53 for low temperature options. Lever Selection . . . . . . . . . page 5--130
Low operating torque-spring return ratings only.

5--41
Limit Switches
802T Lever Type x Spring Return
Range of Operation
Travel to
Operate Contacts
D
Reset Reset
D D
Switch Switch Without

Without Lever Lever and Base

Travel to Cat. No.
Number Reset Switch w/o
of Torque/Force to Travel to Operate Max. Contacts, Switch w/o Lever and
Circuits Lever Movement vs. Contact Operation Operate, Max. Contacts, Max. Travel Max. Lever Base
0.29 N•m (2.6 lb•in) 13° 802T-AP 802T-AP1
7°
Clockwise or Nominal 18° 802T-A5P 802T-A5P1
1 2 1 2 1 2
Counterclockwise 3 4 3 4 3 4 5° Nominal 2.5° Nominal 802T-FP 802T-FP1
0.56 N•m (5 lb•in)
9° 4° 802T-HP 802T-HP1
13° 802T-A1P 802T-A1P1
0.29 N•m (2.6 lb•in) 7°
Clockwise 1 2 1 2 1 2 18° 802T-A3P 802T-A3P1
3 4 3 4 3 4
0.56 N•m (5 lb•in) 9° 4° 802T-H1P 802T-H1P1
2 13° 90° 802T-A2P 802T-A2P1
0.29 N•m (2.6 lb•in) 7°
Counterclockwise 1 2 1 2 1 2 18° 802T-A4P 802T-A4P1
3 4 3 4 3 4
0.56 N•m (5 lb•in) 9° 4° 802T-H2P 802T-A2P1
Clockwise or 1 2 1 2 1 2 802T-ALP 802T-ALP1
Clockwise 1 2 1 2 1 2 0.16 N•m (1.5 lb•in) 13° 7° ‡ 802T-AL1P ‡ 802T-AL1P1

3 4 3 4 3 4
Counterclockwise 1 2 1 2 1 2 802T-AL2P 802T-AL2P1

3 4 3 4 3 4
1 2 1 2 1 2 0.45 N•m (4 lb•in) 13° 7° 802T-ATP 802T-ATP1

Counterclockwise 5 6 5 6 5 6 0.79 N•m (7 lb•in) 9° 4° 802T-HTP 802T-HTP1
7 8 7 8 7 8
1 2 1 2 1 2 0.45 N•m (4 lb•in) 13° 7° 802T-A1TP 802T-A1TP1

3 4 3 4 3 4
4 Clockwise 5 6 5 6
90°
5 6 0.79 N•m (7 lb•in) 9° 4° 802T-H1TP 802T-H1TP1
7 8 7 8 7 8
1 2 1 2 1 2 0.45 N•m (4 lb•in) 13° 7° 802T-A2TP 802T-A2TP1

3 4 3 4 3 4
Counterclockwise 5 6 5 6 5 6 0.79 N•m (7 lb•in) 9° 3.5° 802T-H2TP 802T-H2TP1
7 8 7 8 7 8
Fluorinated elastomer shaft seal is supplied with these devices.

‡ Low operating torque model.
Approximate Dimensions—See page 5--43.

5--42 New Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs.

Limit Switches
802T Lever Type x Spring Return

1.19 14.68
43.71 18.92 (0.047) (0.578)
(1.721) (0.745) 8.74
20.6
103.38 (0.344)
(0.811)
(4.070)
34.93 19.05
(1.375) (0.750) 75.79 23.37
(2.984) (0.920)
70.64
(2.781)
8.74
(0.344) 59.51 83.72
(2.343) (3.296)
36.50
Clearance (1.437)
Holes for
#10--32 42.85
(1.687) 29.36
1/2 in. NPT (1.156)
47.24
(1.860) Conduit Opening 41.78
(1.625)
Plug-in Switch
1/2--14 NPT Shipping Wt. 0.57 1 kg (1.25 lb)
7.8 (0.31)
16.51
(0.650)
5.4 (0.213)
Front
Mounting Hole
(2) #10--32
UNF--2B
Rear Mounting
Holes
5.4 (0.213)
Front
Mounting Hole


5--43
Limit Switches
802T Lever Type x Maintained Contact and Neutral Position
Range of Operation Approximate Dimensions [mm (in.)]

Max Travel Travel to 45.21
Reset Contacts (1.78)
Plug-in Switch 24.89
Shipping Wt. 0.57 kg (1.25 lbs) (0.98)
D
D
D
36.58
Travel to (1.44) 12.7
Operate Contacts (0.50) 20.57
(0.81)
7.8
Operator Head
(0.31)
Maintained Contact Models Switch
7.87
Without Lever (0.31)
Travel to 59.44
Operate Contacts (2.34)
Switch Without 78.99
D Lever and Base (3.11)
Reset Reset Conduit
2--#10--32
D D UNF--2B 18.29
14.73
2--5.4 (0.213) (0.58) 3.30 (0.72)
Holes for 29.46 (0.13)
Front Mtg. Deep for 46.24
(1.16)
41.40 Rear Mtg. 1/2 in. NPT (1.84)
Conduit Opening
Neutral Position Models (1.63)
Product Selection—Maintained Contact Models

Cat. No.
Torque to Travel to Travel to
No. of Operate Operate Max Reset Switch Switch
Circuits Lever Movement vs. Contact Operation (Max.) Contacts (Max.) Travel Contacts (Max.) w/o Lever w/o Lever & Base
Clockwise or 0.31 NSm

2 1 2 1 2 802T-- AMP 802T-- AMP1
Counterclockwise (2.75 lbSin)
3 4 3 4
70q 88q 32q

1 2 1 2
4 3 4 3 4 802T-- AMTP 802T-- AMTP1
5 6 5 6
7 8 7 8
From one maintained position to another.
Product Selection—Neutral Position Models

Torque to Operate (Max.) Cat. No.
Travel to Travel to
Counter- Operate Max Reset Switch Switch
Lever Movement vs. Contact Operation Clockwise clockwise Contacts (Max.) Travel Contacts (Max.) w/o Lever w/o Lever & Base
1 2 1 2 1 2
3 4 3 4 3 4 0.28 NSm 0.47 NSm
13q 75q 7q 802T-- NPTP 802T-- NPTP1
(2.5 lbSin) (4.2 lbSin)
5 6 5 6 5 6
7 8 7 8 7 8


Limit Switches
802T Push Type x Spring Return
Range of Operation
Travel to
Operate Contacts
Travel to
Reset Contacts
D
Max. Travel
Top Adjustable Top Side Top Side Push
Push Rod Push Rod Push Rod Push Roller Horizontal Roller
Product Selection
Contact Operation Cat. No.
Torque/Force Travel to Switch w/o
Number of to Operate, Operate Maximum Travel to Reset Switch Lever and
Circuits Normal Operated Operator Type Max. Contacts, Max. Travel Contacts, Max. w/o Lever Base
Top Push Rod 802T-BP 802T-BP1
1.4 mm 6.0 mm 0.9 mm
Adjustable Top 13.8 N (3.1 lb)
(0.057 in.) (0.236 in.) (0.034 in.) 802T-BAP 802T-BAP1
Push Rod
3.3 mm 5.7 mm 1.9 mm
Side Push Rod 16.4 N (3.7 lb) 802T-CP 802T-CP1
(0.131 in.) (0.226 in.) (0.074 in.)
1 2 1 2 1.4 mm 6.0 mm 0.9 mm
2 Top Push Roller 13.8 N (3.1 lb) 802T-DP 802T-DP1
3 4 3 4 (0.057 in.) (0.236 in.) (0.034 in.)
Side Push
802T-KP 802T-KP1
Vertical Roller
3.3 mm 5.7 mm 1.9 mm
Side Push 16.4 N (3.7 lb)
(0.131 in.) (0.226 in.) (0.074 in.)
Horizontal 802T-K1P 802T-K1P1
Roller
Top Push Rod 802T-BTP 802T-BTP1
1.4 mm 6.0 mm 0.9 mm
Adjustable Top 22.2 N (5.0 lb)
(0.057 in.) (0.236 in.) (0.034 in.) 802T-BATP 802T-BATP1
Push Rod
3.3 mm 5.7 mm 1.9 mm
Side Push Rod 24.9 N (5.6 lb) 802T-CTP 802T-CTP1
1 2 1 2 (0.131 in.) (0.226 in.) (0.074 in.)
3 4 3 4 1.4 mm 6.0 mm 0.9 mm
4 Top Push Roller 22.2 N (5.0 lb) 802T-DTP 802T-DTP1
5 6 5 6 (0.057 in.) (0.236 in.) (0.034 in.)
7 8 7 8 Side Push
802T-KTP 802T-KTP1
Vertical Roller
3.3 mm 5.7 mm 1.9 mm
Side Push 24.9 N (5.6 lb)
(0.131 in.) (0.226 in.) (0.074 in.)
Horizontal 802T-K1TP 802T-K1TP1
Roller
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs. New 5--45

Limit Switches
802T Push Type x Spring Return
8.74 R 4.37
(0.344) (0.172)
5.4 (0.213)
Front
75.79
Mounting Hole
(2.984)
45.72 59.51 83.72 (2) #10--32
70.64 (1.800) (2.343)
(2.781) (3.296) UNF--2B
Rear Mounting
Holes
8.74 36.50 29.36 1.17

(0.344) (1.437) (1.156) (0.046) R
42.85 36.07 5.4 (0.213)
(1.687) (1.420) 1/2 in. NPT Front
Conduit Opening Mounting Hole
41.28
(1.625)
Switch Body
9.65 7.87
(0.38) (0.31) Dia 7/16 in.
Hex
75.44 67.56
43.18 (2.97) Max (2.66) Max
51.31 (1.70)
(2.02) 69.09 61.21
(2.72) Min (2.41) Min
40146-- 013-- 59 40146-- 013-- 65

Top Push Rod Head Adjustable Top Push Rod Head
Shipping Wt. 0.142 kg (5 oz) Shipping Wt. 0.142 kg (5 oz)
12.7 50.8
40.39 (0.5) (2)
(1.59) 12.7
(0.5)
36.58 59.44 51.56 36.58
(1.44) (2.34) (2.03) (1.44)
20.57 20.57
(0.81) (0.81)
12.7 12.7
(0.5) (0.5)
40146-- 017-- 63 40146-- 013-- 60 40146-- 017-- 64

Side Push Rod Head Top Push Roller Head Side Push Roller Head
Shipping Wt. 0.142 kg (5 oz) Shipping Wt. 0.142 kg (5 oz) Shipping Wt. 0.142 kg (5 oz)

Limit Switches
802T Wobble Stick and Cat Whisker x Spring Return
Range of Operation
Travel to
Operate Contacts
D Max Travel
D
D
Travel to
Reset Contacts
Wobble Stick Wobble Stick Wire Cat

Nylon Extension Wire Extension Whisker
Product Selection
Cat. No.
Operate Operate Contacts Max Reset Contacts Complete Switch
Operator Type Contact Operation (Max.) (Max.) Travel (Max.) Switch Without Base
Nylon Wobble Stick 0.51 NSm 802T-- WSP 802T-- WSP1
9q 10q 5q
Wire Wobble Stick 1 2 1 2 (4.5 lbSin) 802T-- WS1P 802T-- WS1P1
3 4 3 4
0.06 NSm
Wire Cat Whisker 21q 28q 14q 802T-- CWP 802T-- CWP1
(8 ozSin)
These switches should be mounted in such a way that the wobble stick or cat whisker will not be deflected beyond the “Maximum Travel” position, as this could cause undesirable repetition of
contact action on rebound.
Operating travels and torque are measured at rigid section of stick or cat whisker.

4.37
8.74 (0.172) R
(0.344)
75.79
(2.984) 5.4 (0.213)
45.72 59.51 83.72 Front
70.64 (1.800) (2.343) (3.296) Mounting Hole
(2.781)
(2) #10--32
UNF--2B
Rear Mounting
8.74 Holes
36.50 29.36
(0.344) (1.437) (1.156)
42.85 36.07
(1.687) (1.420) 1/2 in. NPT
Conduit Opening
41.28 5.4 (0.213)
Switch Body (1.625) Front
Mounting Hole
6.35
1.83 (0.072) 1.98 (0.078) Dia.
(0.25)
O.D. Nylon Tubing
Dia.
148.34 138.18
146.05 330.2 322.33
(5.84) (5.44)
140.46 (5.75) (13) (12.69)
(5.44)
40146-- 126-- 53 40146-- 113-- 53 40146-- 113-- 59

Cat Whisker Head Nylon Wobble Stick Head Wire Wobble Stick Head
Shipping Wt. 0.09 kg (3 oz) Shipping Wt. 0.2 kg (7 oz) Shipping Wt. 0.17 kg (6 oz)

5--47
Limit Switches
802T Low Energy
Specifications
Certifications UL Listed, CSA Certified and CE Marked for all applicable directives
Environmental
Enclosure Type Rating NEMA 4, 13, and 6P
Ambient Temperature [C (F)] - 18}+110q (0}+230q)

- 40}110q (-- 40}230q) low temp. model
Input Voltage 5}28V DC
DC Contact Rating 0.40V A load per pole max

0.025V A load per pole min
Description In today’s age of low energy controls, Plug-in Style

electromechanical switches are more Lever Type x Spring Return page 5--49
Intended for direct connection to PLCs frequently interfacing directly with low
and other low energy circuits, the Push Type x Spring Return . page 5--51
energy circuits. Switching low energy
components and design of these low loads presents a unique challenge.
energy limit switches are optimized for Rockwell Automation is perfectly
long life. situated to assist you with all your low
The primary concern of low energy energy switching needs.
switching is contact contamination.
Since low energy loads do not arc or Features
burn the contacts clean, contaminants
may cause erratic switch behavior. S Welded gold and silver alloy contacts
Rockwell Automation’s low energy limit provide a barrier against surface
switches are designed with welded gold oxides
and silver alloy contacts to provide a S Stationary waffle shape contact
protective barrier against surface reduces the impact of contamination
oxides. A stationary waffle shape
build-up
contact optimizes contact pressure to
stabilize the contact resistance in the S Prism shaped crossbar contact
region of the micro load. A prism provides high pressure to penetrate
shaped crossbar contact provides high foreign particles which could prevent
pressure to penetrate foreign particles contact closure
which could prevent contact closure.
These low energy limit switches are S Snap-acting spanner replicates same
suitable for machine connectivity and reliability performance of our legacy
low voltage facilities. They have a low NEMA products
input voltage of 5}28V DC with contact
S Lever type and push type operating
ratings of 0.025V A min. and 0.40V A
styles
max. per pole.
S Plug-in style for ease of wiring and
Bulletin 802T low energy limit switches conduit and mini-receptacle wiring
are ideal for applications in which heavy
options
duty pilot ratings, a high degree of
versatility and a rugged NEMA Type 4, S Enclosure rating NEMA 4, 13 and
13 and 6P rating are required. Similar to 6P
our full line of standard 802T plug--in
style limit switches, our low energy limit S UL Listed, CSA Certified and CE
switches exist in lever type spring return Marked for applicable directives
and push type spring return. Operating S 5}28V DC and 0.025V A min. and
heads can be mounted in four positions, 0.40V A max. load per pole
90q apart.
Temperature range below 0qC (+32qF) is based

on the absence of freezing moisture or water.
6P only applies to lever type, except low torque.

Limit Switches
802T Low Energy Lever Type x Spring Return
Range of Operation
Travel to
Operate Contacts
D
Reset Reset
D D
Switch
without Lever

Contact Operation for Max. Torque Max. Travel Cat. No.
No. of Clockwise or to Operate to Operate Maximum Travel Max. Travel to Reset
Circuits Counterclockwise Movement [Nxm (lbxin.)] (degrees) (degrees) (degrees) Switch Type Switch w/o Lever
2 1 2 1 2 1 2 0.29 (2.6) 13 90 7 Conduit 802T-- AGP

3 4 3 4 3 4
All low energy limit switches are designed to operate in an ambient temperature of - 18}110qC (0}230qF). This 802T-- AGPE limit Conduit/Low
802T-- AGPE
switch is modified for low temperature operation at - 40}110qC (-- 40}230qF). All other specifications are identical to the 802T-- AGP. Temp.
2 4
Identical to 802T-- AGP but with pre-wired five-pin mini connector. Mini Connector 802T-- AGPJ1
Same 1
Polar-
ity
5 1
1 2 1 2 1 2
0.106 (1.3) Conduit/Low
2 13 90 7 802T-- ALGP
3 4 3 4 3 4 max. Torque
Recommended standard cordset is 889N--F5AFC--6F—straight female 5-pin mini to flying leads, 1.8 m (6 ft) long. For additional cable lengths or styles, see
page 8--4.

5--49
Limit Switches
802T Low Energy Lever Type x Spring Return

1.19 14.68
43.71 18.92 (0.047) (0.578)
(1.721) (0.745) 8.74
103.38 20.6
(0.344)
(4.070) (0.811)
34.93 19.05
(1.375) (0.750) 23.37
75.79
(0.920)
(2.984)
70.64
(2.781)
8.74 83.72
(0.344) 59.51
(2.343) (3.296
36.50
Clearance (1.437)
Holes for
#10-- 32 42.85 29.36
(1.687) 1/2-- 14 (1.156)
47.24 NPT
(1.860) Conduit 41.78
Opening (1.625)
1/2-- 14 NPT Plug--In Switch

Shipping Wt.
7.8 (0.31) 0.571 kg (1.25 lb)
16.51
(0.650)
5.4 (0.213)
Front
Mounting Hole
(2) #10-- 32
UNF-- 2B
Rear Mounting
Holes
5.4 (0.213)
Front
Mounting Hole

Limit Switches
802T Low Energy Push Type x Spring Return
Range of Operation
Travel to
Operate Contacts
Travel to
Reset Contacts D
Max Travel
Side Push Rod Top Push Roller Side Push Vertical Roller
Product Selection
Contact Operation
No. of Operator Force to Operate Travel to Operate Maximum Travel Travel to Reset
Circuits Normal Operated Type [NSm(lb] [mm (in.)] [mm (in.)] [mm (in.)] Cat. No.
Side Push Rod 16.4 (3.68) max. 3.3 (0.131) max. 5.7 (0.226) 1.3 (0.052) max. 802T-- CGP
Top Push
2 1 2 1 2 13.8 (3.1) max. 1.4 (0.057) max. 6.0 (0.236) 0.7 (0.028) 802T-- DGP
Roller
3 4 3 4
Side Push
16.4 (3.68) max. 3.3 (0.131) max. 5.7 (0.226) 1.3 (0.052) max. 802T-- KGP
Vertical Roller

5--51
Limit Switches
802T Low Energy Push Type x Spring Return
R 4.37
(0.172)
5.4 (0.213)
Front
70.64 Mounting Hole
(2.781) 45.72
(1.800) 59.51 (2) #10-- 32
(2.343) UNF-- 2B
Rear Mounting
Holes
8.74 36.50 29.36 1.17 (0.046) R

(0.344) (1.437) (1.156)
36.07 1/2 in. NPT 5.4 (0.213)
(1.420) Conduit Front
Opening Mounting Hole
Switch Body
12.7 50.8
40.39 (0.5) (2)
(1.59) 12.7
(0.5)
36.58 59.44 51.56 36.58
(1.44) (2.34) (2.03)
20.57 (1.44)
20.57
(0.81) (0.81)
12.7 12.7
(0.5) (0.5)
40146-- 017-- 63 40146-- 013-- 60 40146-- 017-- 64
Side Push Rod Head Top Push Roller Head Side Push Roller Head
Shipping Wt. 0.142kg (5oz) Shipping Wt. 0.142kg (5oz) Shipping Wt. 0.142kg (5oz)

Limit Switches
802T Modifications and Accessories
To order lever type limit switches with 5-Pin Mini-Type Receptacle

the fluorinated elastomer shaft seal
“J1” Wiring
only, add V1 to the end of the listed cat.
no. 2 4
Base Assembly
The limit switch base, including the
Same
terminal block, is available as a Polarity
separate unit per the following table.
Cat. No. 5 1
Manifold Indicating 2--Circuit Base . . . . . . . . . . . 802T--X7

Mount Light 2--Circuit Base with
Indicating Light . . . . . . . . . 802T--X7 N
2--Circuit Manifold
Manifold Mount Mount Base . . . . . . . . . . . . 802T--X7U
All two-circuit plug-in limit switches can 4--Circuit Base . . . . . . . . . . . 802T--X8
be supplied with a special terminal base
which permits mounting the switch Low Temperature Operation
“J9” Wiring
manifold style on a machine base, Plug-in limit switches are designed to
panel or raceway. As shown above, this operate in an ambient temperature 5 1
base is supplied with a wiring hole and range of --18}+110qC (0}+230qF),
gasket on the back. --18}+54qC (0}+130qF) for wobble
To order a manifold mount switch, add stick and cat whisker. Special limit Same
the letter U to the listed cat. no.. switches modified for low temperature Polarity
Example: Cat. No. 802T--AP becomes operation at --40}+110qC
Cat. No. 802T--APU. (--40}+230qF) are available.
4
Temperature ranges below 0qC (+32qF) 2
Indicating Light are based on absence of freezing
Bulletin 802T two-circuit plug-in limit moisture or water. To order, add the
switches (except for the cat whisker, letter E to cat. no. Not available on
wobble stick, and manifold mount wobble stick, cat whisker or pre-wired
devices) can be supplied with an cable switches; standard on low torque
indicating light. To order add the letter N and maintained devices.
for 120V AC, 50/60 Hz or N5 for 240V Pre-Wired Cable
AC 50/60 Hz. Example: Cat. No. An appropriate female connector with
802T--AP becomes Cat. No. To order factory installed pre-wired type cable (889N--F5AFC--6F) is available
802T--APN. “STOOW-A” cable for 2-circuit on page 8--4 in Connection Systems.
(5-conductor) and 4-circuit
The indicating light is internally
(9-conductor) switches, add the suffix Y
connected to two isolated terminals in 9-Pin Mini-Type Receptacle
plus the number of feet required.
the base assembly allowing the user to
Example: To order an 802T-AP with “J1” Wiring (“J9” wiring not
wire the light to either the N.O. or the
2.4 m (5 ft) of cable the cat. no. would available for 4 circuit)
N.C. contact. Switches with an
become 802T--APY5. 3 4
indicating light have a contact rating of
NEMA A300. The standard cable length is 2.4 m
(5 ft). Extended cable lengths are Same
Where an indicator light and a pre-wired Polarity
available in multiples of 1.22 m (4 ft)
5-pin mini connector are used, the light 1 2
only.
is pre-wired to the N.C. contact with J1
wiring and to the N.O. contact with J9 Mini-Type Receptacles
wiring. Indicating lights are not available
on 4-circuit 802T switches. To order a bulletin 802T pre-wired limit 8 6
switch with a five-pin (2 circuit) or nine
Fluorinated Elastomer Seals pin (4 circuit) mini connector, add the Same
suffix J1 or J9 depending on desired Polarity
To order limit switches with all
wiring (J9 wiring not available for 9 5
fluorinated elastomer seals, add the
4-circuit models).
letter V to the end of the listed cat. no.
Not available on manifold mount, low
operating torque, low temperature or
limit switches with an indicating light.

cable (889N--F9AF--2) is available on
page 8--14 in Connection Systems.
5--53
Limit Switches
802T
NonPlug-in Style Oiltight Switches
Specifications
Enclosure Rating NEMA 13, IP54
Pollution Degree 3
Ambient Temperature [C (F)] Nonplug-in limit switches are designed to operate in an ambient
temperature range of - 18}+54q (0}+130q).
AC Contact Rating (Maximum per Pole, 50 or 60 Hz, Same Polarity)
Rating Carrying
Designation Max Voltage Make Break Current Make Break
120 60 6.00 10 7200 720
240 30 3.00 10 7200 720
A600
Description AC-- 15 480 15 1.50 10 7200 720
600 12 1.20 10 7200 720
Bulletin 802T limit switches are ideal for
applications in which heavy duty pilot DC Contact Rating (Maximum per Pole, Same Polarity)
ratings, small size, a high degree of Voltage Range Current Rating
versatility and a rugged NEMA Type 13
oiltight construction are desirable. An 115-- 125 0.4 A
important factor in the automation of 230-- 250 0.2 A
industry, these limit switches are being 550-- 600 0.1 A
applied extensively on conveyor
systems, transfer machines, automatic Temperature range below 0_C (+32_F) is based on the absence of freezing moisture or water.
turret lathes, milling and boring See page 5--73 for Extended Temperature Option.
machines, radial drills, and many other
types of modern, high speed production NonPlug-in Style
equipment. 2-Circuit 4-Circuit Horizontal Construction
A wide variety of operating heads and Lever Type x Spring Return page 5--55 Lever Type x Spring Return page 5--66
operating levers are available. Standard and Low Operating Torque
Operating heads can be mounted in Lever Type x Maintained . . . page 5--67
Models Contact
four positions, 90q apart. Lever Type with DeviceNet page 10--15 Push Type x Spring . . . . . . . page 5--68
Features Output x Spring Return Return & Maintained Contact
Lever Type x Maintained . . . page 5--56 Wobble Stick & Cat . . . . . . . page 5--70
S Side rotary, wobble stick, cat whisker, Contact and Neutral Position
adjustable top and top or side push Whisker x Spring Return
styles, with or without rollers Lever Type with Time . . . . . page 5--57 Dual Switch Lever and . . . . page 5--71
Delay x Spring Return (1-Circuit) Push Types x Spring Return
S Rugged construction
Push Type x Spring Return . page 5--59 Air-Operated x Spring Return page 5--72
S Proven reliability and Maintained Contact
Wobble Stick and Cat . . . . . page 5--61 Accessories
4-Circuit Vertical Construction Operating Levers
Lever Type x Spring . . . . . . . page 5--62 Lever Selection . . . . . . . . . page 5--130
Return & Maintained Contact
Push Type x Spring . . . . . . . page 5--63
Return & Maintained Contact
Wobble Stick and Cat . . . . . page 5--65

Limit Switches
802T 2-Circuit Lever Type x Spring Return
zl

Travel to Travel to 55.63
Operate Contacts Operate Contacts (2.22)
NonPlug-in Switch
Shipping Wt. 0.45 kg (1 lb) 16.76
D D (0.66)
6.34
(0.25)
12.7
Travel to Travel to (0.5)
72.14
(2.84) Operating
Lever Operation with 59.44 Head
Standard Levers (2.34)
Conduit
2--5.4 (0.213) Dia. 14.73 21.34
802T-- A Holes for (0.58) (0.84)
Front Mounting 29.46
(1.16) 0.5 in. Dia.
802T-- ALW5 NPT
38.86 45.21
(1.53) (1.78)

Torque to Travel to Operate Max Travel to Reset
Lever Movement vs. Contact Operation Operate (Max.) Contacts (Max.) Travel Contacts (Max.) Cat. No.
0.34 NSm
16.5q 43q 8q 802T-- A
Clockwise or 1 2 1 2
(3 lbSin)
1 2
6q 50q 3q 802T-- H
(4.5 lbSin)
0.40 NSm
16.5q 43q 8q 802T-- A1
(3.5 lbSin)
Clockwise 1 2 1 2 1 2
3 4 3 4 3 4 0.51 NSm
6.5q 50q 3q 802T-- H1
(4.5 lbSin)
0.40 NSm
16.5q 43q 8q 802T-- A2
(3.5 lbSin)
3 4 3 4 3 4 0.51 NSm
6.5q 50q 3q 802T-- H2
(4.5 lbSin)
Clockwise
Lever cannot 1 2 1 2 802T-- L1
move counterclockwise 3 4 3 4 0.45 NSm
20q 91q 11q
Counterclockwise (4 lbSin)
Lever cannot 1 2 1 2 802T-- L2
move clockwise 3 4 3 4
802T-- ALW5
0.09 NSm
Clockwise 1 2 1 2 1 2 22q 43q 12q 802T-- AL1W5
(12.5 ozSin)
3 4 3 4 3 4
Counterclockwise 1 2 1 2 1 2 802T-- AL2W5

3 4 3 4 3 4
These low operating torque limit switches can only be supplied with cat. no. 802T- W5 rod lever. The rod can easily be formed to meet special application requirements.


5--55
Limit Switches
802T 2-Circuit Lever Type x Maintained Contact and Neutral Position
Range of Operation
Max Travel Travel to Travel to Travel to
Reset Contacts Operate Contacts Operate Contacts
D D D
D
D
Travel to Travel to
Travel to
Operate Contacts
802T-- AM 802T-- NP
Maintained Contact Models Neutral Position Models
Product Selection
Contact Lever Movement vs. Torque to Travel to Operate Travel to Reset
Type Contact Operation Operate (Max.) Contacts (Max.) Max Travel Contacts (Max.) Cat. No.
Maintained 1 2 1 2 70q 84q 50q 802T-- AM

3 4 3 4 0.25 NSm
(2.25 lbSin)
Neutral 1 2 1 2 1 2 12q 53q 6q 802T-- NP
Position
3 4 3 4 3 4

62.48
(2.46)
16.76
(0.66) 59.52 (2.36)
16.61
(0.65)
6.35
(0.25) 30.09
(1.18)
12.7 72.14 12.7

(0.5) (2.84) (0.5) 6.55
Operating (0.26)
59.44 Head Operating
(2.34) Head
72.72
(2.86)
Conduit
2--5.4 (0.213) Dia. 14.73 21.34 14.27
Holes for (0.58) (0.84) 6.55 (0.26) 43.55
Front Mounting 29.46 39.37 (1.71)
0.5 in. Dia. (0.26)
(1.16) (1.55)
NPT
38.86 45.21
(1.53) (1.78)
NonPlug-in Switch NonPlug-in Switch

Shipping Wt. 0.45 kg (1 lb) Shipping Wt. 0.45 kg (1 lb)
802T-- AM 802T-- NP


Limit Switches
802T 1-Circuit Lever Type with Time Delay x Spring Return
802T-- R1TD with 802T-- W1 Lever
Product Selection
Torque Travel to
to Operate Cat. No.
Operate Contact Max
Lever Movement vs. Contact Operation (Max.) (Max.) Overtravel Travel
On-Delay
Off-Delay
802T-- R1TD 802T-- R7TD

Clockwise 1 2 1 2
Lever cannot move
counterclockwise 802T-- R3TD 802T-- R5TD
1 2 1 2 0.23
Approx.
NSm 45q 45q
90q
(2 lbSin) 802T-- R2TD 802T-- R8TD
Lever cannot move
clockwise 802T-- R4TD 802T-- R6TD
1 2 1 2
Required for Timing Accuracy.

The time delay is adjustable from 0.5}15 seconds r 25%.
Contacts are rated for 3 A, 120V AC maximum.
The lever travel must be faster than the timing setting.
Time delay occurs after lever is moved to operated position
Time delay occurs after lever is moved from operated to normal position

5--57
Limit Switches
802T

66.8
(2.63)
45.21 26.92
(1.78) (1.06)
19
(0.75) Dia.
38.1 6.35
(1.5) (0.25)
12.7
(0.5)
95.25
(3.75)
Time Delay Switch with 802T-- W1 Lever
107.95 Shipping Wt. 0.90 kg (2 lbs)
(4.25)
Conduit
41.4 6.35 0.5s Dia. 28.7

(1.63) (0.25) NPT 64.26 (1.13)
54.1 (4) 5.5 (0.218) Dia. (2.53)
(2.13) Mounting Holes


Limit Switches
802T 2-Circuit Push Type x Spring Return and Maintained Contact
Top Push Rod Adjustable Side Push Rod Top Push Side Push Side Push Rod
Top Push Rod Roller Roller Maintained
Range of Operation
Spring Return Maintained

Travel to
Operate Contacts
Max Travel
Travel to
Reset Contacts
D
D Normal Operated
D
Travel to Travel to
Max Travel Operate Contacts Operate Contacts
Product Selection
Contact Operation Travel to
Force to Operate Travel to Reset
Operator Type Normal Operated Operate (Max.) Contacts (Max.) Max Travel Contacts (Max.) Cat. No.
Top Push Rod 802T-- B
1 2 1 2 15.6 N 1.9 mm 5.1 mm 0.8 mm 802T-- BA
Adjustable Top Push Rod
3 4 3 4 (3.5 lb) (0.075 in.) (0.202 in.) (0.030 in.)
Top Push Roller 802T-- D
Side Push Rod 802T-- C

20.0 N 3.2 mm 5.5 mm 1.5 mm 802T-- K
(4.5 lb) (0.125 in.) (0.218 in.) (0.057 in.)
Side Push Horizontal Roller 1 2 1 2 802T-- K1
3 4 3 4
4.87 mm 5.30 mm
Maintained Contact 35.6 N 5.96 mm
(0.192 in.) (0.209 in.) 802T-- CM
Side Push Rod (8 lbs) (0.235 in.)
Nominal Nominal

5--59
Limit Switches
802T 2-Circuit Push Type x Spring Return and Maintained Contact
72.14
(2.84) Operating
Head
59.44
(2.34)
Conduit
2--5.4 (0.213), 14.73 21.34
Dia. Holes for (0.58) (0.84)
Front Mtg. 0.5s Dia.
29.46
NPT
(1.16)
38.86 45.21
(1.53) (1.78)
NonPlug-in Switch
Shipping Wt. 0.45 kg (1 lb)
4.06
(0.16) 12.7
9.65
(0.38) (0.5)
67.56
(2.66)
(Max.
43.69 ) 51.56
61.21 (2.03)
(1.72)
(2.41)
(Min.)
802T-- B Top Push Rod Head 802T-- BA Adjustable 802T-- D Top Push Roller Head
Shipping Wt. 0.128 kg (4.5 oz) Top Push Rod Head Shipping Wt. 0.128 kg (4.5 oz)
33.27 36.83 33.27 46.74 30.23 2.87 48.51

(1.31) (1.45) (1.31) (1.84) (1.19) (1.13) (1.91)
11.18
(0.44)
7.87 12.7
7.87
(0.31) 12.7 (0.5)
12.7 12.7 (0.31)
(0.5) (0.5) (0.5)
802T-- C Side Push Rod Head 802T-- K Side Push Roller Head 802T-- CM Maintained Side Push Rod Head
Shipping Wt. 0.128 kg (4.5 oz) Shipping Wt. 0.128 kg (4.5 oz) Shipping Wt. 4.5 oz (0.128 kg)

Limit Switches
802T 2-Circuit Wobble Stick and Cat Whisker x Spring Return
Range of Operation
Travel to
Operate Contacts
D Max Travel
D
D
Travel to
Reset Contacts
Wobble Stick Wobble Stick Cat Whisker

Nylon Extension Wire Extension
Product Selection
Travel to Travel to
Torque to Operate Reset
Operator Type Contact Operation Operate (Max.) Contacts (Max.) Max Travel Contacts (Max.) Cat. No.
Nylon Wobble Stick 802T-- WS
0.51 NSm
9q 10q 4q
Wire Wobble Stick (4.5 lbSin) 802T-- WS1
1 2 1 2
3 4 3 4 0.06 NSm
Wire Cat Whisker 21q 22q 14q 802T-- CW
(8 ozSin)
Operating travels and torque are measured at rigid section of stick or cat whisker.
6.35 1.98
72.14 (0.25) (0.078) Dia 1.82 (0.072)
(2.84) Operating O.D.
Head Nylon Tubing
59.44
(2.34) 319.02 127
135.64 (5)
(12.56)
Conduit (5.34)
2--5.4 (0.213), 14.73 21.34

Dia. Holes for (0.58) (0.84)
Front Mounting 29.46 0.5 in. Dia.
(1.16) NPT
38.86 45.21
(1.53) (1.78) 5.59
(0.22)
Z-- 18210 Nylon Z-- 18211 Wire Z-- 25142

NonPlug-in Switch Wobble Stick Head Wobble Stick Head Cat Whisker Head
Shipping Wt. Shipping Wt. Shipping Wt. Shipping Wt.
0.45 kg (1 lb) 0.128 kg (4.5 oz) 0.149 kg (5.25 oz) 0.028 kg (1 oz)

5--61
Limit Switches
802T Vertical 4-Circuit Push Type x Spring Return & Maintained Contact
57.91
(2.28)
18.29
Travel to Travel to 45.21
19 (0.72)
Operate Contacts Operate Contacts (1.78)
(0.75) Dia.
38.1
D (1.5)
D 7.87
(0.31)
12.7
(0.5)
Travel to Travel to
Reset Contacts Reset Contacts Operating
Switch 122.17 Head
Without Lever (4.81)
103.12
(4.06)
Conduit
17.53 19 19
34.93 (0.69) (0.75) (0.75)
(1.375) 45.97 46.74
Dia. NPT (1.84)
(1.81)
4 Circuit NonPlug-in Switch with 802T-- W1 Lever
Shipping Wt. 0.57 kg (1.25 lb)
Product Selection
Torque to Travel to Operate Travel to Reset
Lever Movement vs. Contact Operation Operate (Max.) Contacts (Max.) Max Travel Contacts (Max.) Cat. No.
0.34 NSm
1 2 1 2 1 2 18q 42q 14q 802T-- AT
Clockwise or (3 lbSin)
3 4 3 4 3 4
Counterclockwise 0.68 NSm
5 6 5 6 5 6 9q 50q 6q 802T-- HT
(6 lbSin)
7 8 7 8 7 8
0.40 NSm
1 2 1 2 1 2 18q 42q 14q 802T-- A1T
(3.5 lbSin)
Clockwise 3 4 3 4 3 4
5 6 5 6 5 6 0.68 NSm
9q 50q 6q 802T-- H1T
(6 lbSin)
7 8 7 8 7 8
0.40 NSm
1 2 1 2 1 2 18q 42q 14q 802T-- A2T
(3.5 lbSin)
5 6 5 6 5 6 0.68 NSm
9q 50q 6q 802T-- H2T
(6 lbSin)
7 8 7 8 7 8
Clockwise 1 2 1 2
Lever cannot move 3 4 3 4 802T-- L1T
counterclockwise 5 6 5 6
7 8 7 8 0.45 NSm
28q 91q 18q
(4 lbSin)
Lever cannot move 3 4 3 4 802T-- L2T
clockwise 5 6 5 6
7 8 7 8
84q
Maintained Contact 1 2 1 2
0.34 NSm From one
Clockwise or 3 4 3 4 75q 50q 802T-- AMT
(3 lbSin) maintained position
Counterclockwise
5 6 5 6 to the other
7 8 7 8


Limit Switches
Top Rod Adjustable Top Side Rod Top Roller Side Roller Side Rod
Push Rod
Range of Operation

Travel to
Operate Contacts
Max Travel
Travel to
Reset Contacts
D
D Normal Operated
D
Travel to Travel to
Product Selection
Contact Operation
Force to Travel to Operate Max Travel to Reset Catalog
Operator Type Normal Operated Operate (Max.) Contacts (Max.) Travel Contacts (Max.) Number
Top Push Rod 802T-- BT
1 2 1 2 24.4 N 1.6 mm
Adjustable Top Push Rod (5.5 lb) (0.062 in.) 802T-- BAT
3 4 3 4
5 6 5 6 28.9 N 2.4 mm
Side Push Rod 802T-- CT
7 8 7 8 (6.5 lb) (0.094 in.)
3.6 mm 6.0 mm
24.4 N (0.140 in.) (0.234 in.) 1.6 mm
Top Push Roller 802T-- DT
(5.5 lb) (0.062 in.)
1 2 1 2
Side Push Vertical Roller 802T-- KT
3 4 3 4 28.9 N 2.4 mm
Side Push Horizontal Roller 5 6 5 6 (6.5 lb) (0.094 in.) 802T-- K1T
Maintained Contact 7 8 7 8 62.2 N 3.93 mm 5.96 mm 5.30 mm

802T-- CMT
Side Push Rod (14 lb) (0.155 in.) Nominal (0.235 in.) (0.180 in.) Nominal
These devices are not available with fluorinated elastomer seals or neon indicating lights.

5--63
Limit Switches
122.17
(4.81) Operating
Head
103.12
(2.34)
17.53
19
34.93 (0.69) 0.75 Dia. (0.75)
(1.375) NPT
45.97 46.74
(1.81) (1.84)
NonPlug-in Switch
Shipping Wt. 0.57 kg (1.25 lb)
4.06
9.65 (0.16)
(0.38)
33.27 36.83
67.56 (1.31) (1.45)
(2.66)
43.69 Max
(1.72) 61.21
(2.41)
Min
7.87
12.7 (0.31)
(0.5)
802T-- BT Adjustable Top Push Rod Head 802T-- CT
Top Push Rod Head for 802T-- BAT Side Push Rod Head
Shipping Wt. 0.128 kg (4.5 oz) Shipping Wt. 0.128 kg (4.5 oz) Shipping Wt. 0.128 kg (4.5 oz)
12.7
(0.5)
33.27 2.87 48.51
(1.31) 46.74 30.23
(1.84) (1.19) (1.13) (1.91)
51.56
(2.03)
12.7
(0.5)
12.7 7.87 11.18
12.7 (0.5) (0.31) (0.44)
(0.5)
802T-- DT 802T-- KT 802T-- CMT
Top Push Roller Head 802T-- K1T Maintained Side Push Rod Head
Shipping Wt. 0.128 kg (4.5 oz) Side Push Roller Head Shipping Wt. 0.128 kg (4.5 oz)
Not a saleable item.

Limit Switches
802T Vertical 4-Circuit Wobble Stick and Cat Whisker x Spring Return
Range of Operation
Travel to
Operate Contacts
D Max Travel
D
D
Travel to
Reset Contacts
Wobble Stick
Travels Are Measured at Rigid
Section of Stick or Whisker Cat Whisker
Product Selection
Operator Torque to Travel to Operate Max Travel to Reset
Type Contact Operation Operate (Max.) Contacts (Max.) Travel Contacts (Max.) Cat. No.
Nylon
Wobble 802T-- WST
Stick 1 2 1 2
3 4 3 4
0.79 NSm
12q 12q 9q
(7 lbSin)
5 6 5 6
Wire
7 8 7 8 802T-- WS1T
Cat Whisker
These switches should be mounted in such a way that the wobble stick or cat whisker will not be deflected beyond the ”Maximum Travel” position, as this could cause undesirable repetition of
6.35 1.98
(0.25) (0.078) Dia
122.17
(4.81) Operating
Head
135.64 319.02
(5.34) (12.56)
103.12
(2.34)
Z-- 18210 Nylon Z-- 18211 Wire

Wobble Stick Head Wobble Stick Head
17.53 Shipping Wt. 0.128 kg Shipping Wt. 0.149 kg
19
34.93 (0.69) 0.75 Dia. (0.75) (4.5 oz) (5.25 oz)
(1.375) NPT
45.97 46.74 NonPlug-in Switch
(1.81) (1.84) Shipping Wt. 0.45 kg (1 lb)

5--65
Limit Switches
802T Horizontal 4-Circuit Lever Type x Spring Return
Range of Operation
Travel to Travel to Travel to
Operate Contacts Operate Contacts Operate Contacts
Max Travel D Max Travel D
Max Travel D No Contact
D D D Movement
Travel to
Reset Contacts Travel to
Reset Contacts Travel to
Reset Contacts
Lever Operation When Lever Operation When 802T-- W7 and Switch

Standard Levers Are Used W8 “One-Way” Levers Are Used Without Lever
Product Selection

Operate Operate Max Reset
Lever Movement vs. Contact Operation (Max.) Contacts (Max.) Travel Contacts (Max.) Cat. No.
0.34 NSm
14q 42q 8q 802T-- ATH
Clockwise or (3 lbSin)
1 25 6 1 25 6 1 25 6
Counterclockwise 0.68 NSm
3 47 8 3 47 8 3 47 8 6q 50q 3q 802T-- HTH
(6 lbSin)
0.39 NSm
14q 42q 8q 802T-- A1TH
(3.5 lbSin)
1 25 6 1 25 6 1 25 6
Clockwise 0.68 NSm
3 47 8 3 47 8 3 47 8 6q 50q 3q 802T-- H1TH
(6 lbSin)
0.39 NSm
14q 42q 8q 802T-- A2TH
(3.5 lbSin)
Counterclockwise 1 25 6 1 25 6 1 25 6
3 47 8 3 47 8 3 47 8 0.68 NSm
6q 50q 3q 802T-- H2TH
(6 lbSin)
Clockwise
Lever cannot move 1 25 6 1 25 6 802T-- L1TH
counterclockwise 3 47 8 3 47 8 0.45 NSm
20q 91q 11q
Lever cannot move 1 25 6 1 25 6 802T-- L2TH
clockwise 3 47 8 3 47 8

56.39
45.21
(2.22)
(1.78)
19 16.76
(0.75) Dia. (0.66)
38.1
(1.5) 6.35
(0.25)
12.7 2-Pole Horizontal Switch with 802T-- W1 Lever
(0.5) Shipping Wt. 0.91 kg (2 lbs)
88.9
Operating
(3.5)
Head
76.2
(3)
Conduit 19.0
Position B (0.75) Conduit Position C
Conduit
76.2 (3) 20.6
6.35 (0.81)
88.9 (0.25) 19 46.0
(3.5) (0.75) (1.81)
Conduit Position A Dia. NPT
44.5
(1.75)
Conduit positions for modifications S1, S2, S3


Limit Switches
802T Horizontal 4-Circuit Lever Type x Maintained Contact
Range of Operation
Max Travel
Travel to
Reset Contacts
D
D
D
Travel to
Operate Contacts Switch
Without Lever
Product Selection
Lever Movement vs. Contact Operation Operate (Max.) Contacts (Max.) Max Travel Contacts (Max.) Cat. No.
84q
0.34 NSm
70q From one maintained 35q 802T-- AMTH
3 47 8 3 47 8 position to the other

56.39
(2.22)
45.21
(1.78) 16.76
19 (0.66)
(0.75) Dia.
38.1
(1.5)
6.35
12.7 (0.25)
(0.5)
2-Pole Horizontal Switch

Operating
76.2 Head with 802T-- W1 Lever
(3) Shipping Wt. 0.91 kg (2 lb)
88.9
(3.5)
Conduit
76.2 (3) 6.35 4.83

88.9 (3.5)
(0.25) 30.23 (0.19)
19 (1.19)
(0.75)
Dia. NPT


5--67
Limit Switches
802T Horizontal 4-Circuit Push Type x Spring Return & Maintained Contact
Top Adjustable Top Side Top Side Side Push Rod

Push Rod Push Rod Push Rod Push Roller Push Roller Maintained
Contact
Range of Operation

Travel to
Operate Contacts
Max Travel
Travel to
Reset Contacts
D
D Normal Operated
D
Travel to Travel to
Product Selection
Contact Operation Force to Travel to Travel to
Operator Type Normal Operated (Max.) Contacts (Max.) Travel Contacts (Max.) Cat. No.
Top Push Rod 802T-- BTH
2.4 mm 1.2 mm 802T-- BATH
Adjustable Top Push Rod 1 25 6 1 25 6
(0.094 in.) (0.046 in.)
3 47 8 3 47 8
Top Push Roller 802T-- DTH
24.4 N 5.9 mm
Side Push Rod (5.5 lbs) (0.234 in.) 802T-- CTH
2.8 mm 1.6 mm 802T-- KTH
(0.109 in.) (0.062 in.)
Side Push Horizontal Roller 1 25 6 1 25 6 802T-- K1TH
3 47 8 3 47 8
4.87 mm 5.30 mm
Maintained Contact 62.2 N 5.96 mm
(0.192 in.) (0.209 in.) 802T-- CMTH
Side Push Rod (14 lbs) (0.235 in.)
Nominal Nominal

Limit Switches
802T Horizontal 4-Circuit Push Type x Spring Return & Maintained Contact
Operating
76.2 Head
(3)
88.9
(3.5)
Conduit
76.2 (3) 6.35 4.83

(0.25) 30.23 (0.19)
88.9 (3.5) 19 (1.19)
(0.75)
Dia. NPT
2-Pole Horizontal Switch Base

Shipping Wt. 0.91 kg (2 lb)
4.06
9.65 (0.16)
(0.38)
33.27 36.83
67.56 (1.31) (1.45)
(2.66)
Max
43.69 61.21
(1.72) (2.41)
Min 7.87
12.7 (0.31)
(0.5)
Z-- 19243 Adjustable Top Push Rod Head Z-- 21165
Top Push Rod Head for 802T-- KTH Side Push Rod Head
12.7
(0.5)
30.23 2.87 48.51

33.27 46.74 (1.13) (1.91)
(1.31) (1.19)
(1.84)
51.56
(2.03)
12.7
12.7 (0.5)
(0.5) 7.87 11.18
12.7 (0.31) (0.44)
(0.5)
Z-- 19241 Z-- 21166 Z-- 21168

Top Push Roller Head Side Push Roller Head Maintained Side Push Rod Head
Not a saleable item.

5--69
Limit Switches
802T Horizontal 4-Circuit Wobble Stick & Cat Whisker x Spring Return
Range of Operation
Travel to
Operate Contacts
D Max Travel
D
D
Travel to
Reset Contacts
Travels Are Measured at

Rigid Section of Stick
Wobble Stick
Cat Whisker
Product Selection
Operator Type Contact Operation Operate (Max.) Contacts (Max.) Max Travel Contacts (Max.) Cat. No.
Nylon Wobble
802T-- WSTH
Stick
1 25 6 1 25 6
0.79 NSm
12q 12q 9q
Wire Cat (7 lbSin)
3 47 8 3 47 8 802T-- WS1TH
Whisker
These switches should be mounted in such a way that the wobble stick or cat whisker will not be deflected beyond the ”Maximum Travel” position, as this could cause undesirable repetition of
6.35 1.98 Dia

(0.25) (0.078)
Operating
Head
76.2
(3)
135.64 319.02
88.9 (5.34) (12.56)
(3.5)
Conduit
76.2 6.35 4.83

88.9 (3) (0.25) 19 30.23 (0.19)
(3.5) (0.75) (1.19)
Dia. NPT
Z-- 29195 Nylon Z-- 32109 Wire
2-Pole Horizontal Switch Wobble Stick Head Wobble Stick Head
Shipping Wt. 0.91 kg (2 lb) Shipping Wt. 0.128 kg (4.5 oz) Shipping Wt. 0.149 kg (5.25 oz)

Limit Switches
802T Dual Switch Lever and Push Types x Spring Return
Dual Switch with

802T-- W1 Levers
Product Selection
Right Hand Switch

802T- A 802T- H 802T- A1 802T- A2 802T- C 802T- D
802T-- A 802T-- AD 802T-- AHD 802T-- AA1D 802T-- AA2D 802T-- ACD 802T-- ADD
802T-- H 802T-- HAD 802T-- HD 802T-- HA1D 802T-- HA2D 802T-- HCD 802T-- HDD
802T-- A1 802T-- A1AD 802T-- A1HD 802T-- A1D 802T-- A1A2D 802T-- A1CD 802T-- A1DD
Left Hand Switch
802T-- A2 802T-- A2AD 802T-- A2HD 802T-- A2A1D 802T-- A2D 802T-- A2CD 802T-- A2DD
802T-- C 802T-- CAD 802T-- CHD 802T-- CA1D 802T-- CA2D 802T-- CD 802T-- CDD
802T-- D 802T-- DAD 802T-- DHD 802T-- DA1D 802T-- DA2D 802T-- DCD 802T-- DD
Ordering Information—Refer to limit switch listings on pages 5--55 and 5--59 determine which units and levers are correct for the desired application. Select left limit switch from left hand vertical
column. Select right hand switch from right hand horizontal column. The correct cat. no. is found at the intersecting box.
Most levers listed on page 5--130 can be used. When dual limit switch combinations are desired, consult your local Rockwell Automation sales office or Allen-Bradley Distributor(see page 13--1).
18.54 18.54 56.39

(0.73) (0.73) (2.22)
45.21
(1.78)
19 16.76
(0.75) (0.66)
38.1
(1.5)
12.7
(0.5)
Dual Switch with 802T-- W1 Levers
Shipping Wt. 0.91 kg (2 lbs)
76.2
(3)
88.9
(3.5)
Conduit
76.2 19 20.57
88.9 (3) (0.75) (0.81)
0.75 45.97
(3.5) (1.81)
Dia NPT


5--71
Limit Switches
802T Air-Operated x Spring Return
Product Selection
Cat. No.
Contact Operation Single Unit Double Unit
Will operate when 25 psi (172 kPa) r25% of air pressure is applied,
and will reset with a pressure drop of 6}15 psi (41}103 kPa). 802T-- P 802T-- 2P
Maximum allowable pressure is 100 psi (680 kPa).
When the switch is in the reset state a small rod protrudes from the top of the die casting. The rod is flush with the surface when the switch trips on higher pressure. The switch can be manually
operated by pressing down on the rod.
Contact operation similar to 2-circuit devices.
Contact operation similar to 4-circuit horizontal construction devices.

6.35 16.76
9.65
(0.25) (0.66)
(0.38)
26.92 6.35
(1.06) (0.25)
72.14 Air-Operated Switch

(2.84)
Shipping Wt. 0.34 kg (12 oz)
59.44
(2.34)
Conduit
14.73
2--5.4 (0.213) 21.34
(0.58)
Dia. Holes for (0.84)
29.46
Front Mtg. 0.5 in. Dia.
(1.16)
NPT 43.69
38.86 (1.72)
(1.53)

Limit Switches
802T Modifications and Accessories
Cavity Mounting Transparent Cover Neon Indicating Lights

Switches can be furnished with a (2-Circuit Models Only)
gasket, transparent plastic cover. This Two circuit Bulletin 802T surface
modification enables the electrician to mounted limit switches can be supplied
inspect terminal wiring without removing with two neon indicating lights—AC
the switch cover. Not available on cat 208/240V, 50}60 Hz and 120V,
whisker, time delay or cavity style 50}60 Hz. To order, add the letter N for
Front View Rear View mounted limit switches. 120V or N5 for 240V before the lever
802T-- AO with 802T-- W1A Lever To order a switch with a transparent designation. Example: Cat. No.
cover, add the letter Z to the cat. no. of 802T--A1 with indicating lights would be
the switch. For example: Cat. No. 802T--A1N. Not available on 4-circuit
802T--D becomes Cat. No. 802T--DZ. devices.
Manifold Mounting
In addition, indicating light kits as shown
Extended in the table below are available for field
Temperature Operation installation on two circuit devices.
Bulletin 802T nonplug-in limit switches Light Kit Cat. No.

are designed to operate in a
temperature range of --18}+54qC Limit Switch 120V AC 208/240V AC
802T-- AMU with 802T-- W4A Lever (0}+130qF). Special limit switches Construction 50}60 Hz 50}60 Hz
modified for extended temperature Surface
operation --29}+121qC (--20}+250qF) 802T- N1 802T- N4
Mounted
are available.
Cavity Mounting Neutral Position 802T- N2 802T- N10
Note: Temperature ranges below 0qC
Except for the types identified by Cat. (+32qF) are based on the absence of
Nos. 802T--B, 802T--D, 802T--WS, freezing moisture or water. Conduit Seal
802T--WS1, and 802T--CW, Bulletin
802T switches can be supplied in a To order a Bulletin 802T modified for A synthetic rubber conduit seal is
special construction for cavity mounting extended temperature operation, insert available to protect the conduit opening
in a machine base or panel. With this the letter E after the operating head against entry of oil and moisture. The
construction, the actuator and contact designation. Example: Cat. No. 802T--A seal can be added easily before switch
block are mounted on the back of a becomes Cat. No. 802T--AE. (Cat. Nos. installation and should be installed so
gasket steel plate. To order a switch for 802T--WS, WS1, CW, P, 2P and the that the 5/8 inch diameter projection
cavity mounting, add the letter O to the time delay limit switches are not (the other projection is 23/32 inch
cat. no. of the corresponding surface available for extended temperature diameter) faces against the shoulder at
mounted switch. Example: Cat. No. operation. Cat. Nos. 802T--A3 and A4 the bottom of the pipe tap. The seal can
802T--A becomes cat. no. 802T--AO are available for extended temperature accommodate up to four wires of #12
(shown). operation except with a reduction in gauge or smaller. Each wire hole in the
damping.) seal has a thin inner wall which is
pierced when a wire is passed through.
Manifold Mounting Thus, any unused opening remains
Special Conduit Positions
All two-circuit Bulletin 802T switches sealed. The seat is designed for single
can be supplied with a special base Dual operating head switches can be contact block, surface mounted base
which permits mounting the switch obtained with up to three conduit limit switches having 1/2 inch conduit
manifold style on a machine base, openings. The location of conduit openings.
panel or raceway. This base is openings A, B, and C are illustrated in
equipped with a wiring hole and the dimension drawing on page 5--66. Conduit seal Cat. No. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 802T- N3
synthetic rubber gasket on the back The conduit opening in Position A is
(see illustration). 3/4 in. NPT, the conduit openings in
Position B and C are 1/2 inch NPT. To Special Conduit Lock Nut
To order a switch with a manifold order a switch with special conduit
mounting base, add the letter U to the This option, a “Tru-Seal” nut with
positioning, add the suffix S1, S2 or S3
cat. no. Example: Cat. No. 802T--AM threaded PTFE insert, is a valuable
to the cat. no. per the following:
becomes cat. no. 802T--AMU (shown). accessory for any Bulletin 802T which
S1=Position A+B is connected by means of conduit.
S2=Position A+C
S3=Position B+C “Tru-Seal” lock nut for 1/2 inch conduit
Cat. No. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 802T- X4

5--73
Limit Switches
802X
Watertight or Hazardous Location Switches
Specifications
Enclosure Rating NEMA 7 and 9/Class I, Groups B, C and D or Class II, Groups E, F and
G or Class III; NEMA 4/nonhazardous locations
Certifications UL Listed and CSA Certified
Ambient Temperature [C (F)] Push type with spring return and all
lever types except neutral position: - 46}+121q (-- 50}+250q)
Wobble stick and cat whisker devices: - 29}+54q (-- 20}+130q)
Side push maintained: - 46}+121q (-- 50}+250q)
Neutral position: - 18}+121q (0}+250q).
AC Contact Rating (Maximum per Pole, 50 or 60Hz, same polarity)

Rating Max Carrying
120 60 6.00 10 7200 720
Description A600 240 30 3.00 10 7200 720
Bulletin 802X NEMA Type 7 and 9 limit 480 15 1.50 10 7200 720
switches are designed for use in 600 12 1.20 10 7200 720
atmospheres and locations defined as
DC Contact Rating (Maximum per Pole)
Class I, Groups B, C or D, Division 1,
Class II, Groups E, F or G, or Class III in NEMA A Continuous VA
the National Electrical Code. Typical Rating Max Carrying
applications for this switch include
refineries, distilleries, grain elevators P150 125 1.1 5 138
and flour mills. For Class I, Division 2
Temperature ranges below 0qC (+32qF) are based on the absence of freezing moisture or water.
locations, a Bulletin 802R limit switch
may also be used (see page 5--34).
Bulletin 802X NEMA Type 4 watertight A wide variety of operating heads and Watertight or
limit switches are designed for use operating levers are available. Hazardous Location
indoors in locations where their internal Operating heads can be mounted in
four positions, 90q apart. The enclosure Lever Type x Spring Return page 5--75
parts require protection against Standard and Neutral Position Models
seepage of water and splashing, falling base has two through holes for front
mounting, two tapped holes for rear Lever Type x . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5--76
or hose-directed water within the limits
mounting and two tapped holes for side Maintained Contact
of the NEMA specified tests for Type 4
watertight enclosures. They are not mounting. Push Type x Spring Return . page 5--77
sleet- (ice-) proof. Typical applications Push Type x . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5--79
are dairies and food processing plants. Features Maintained Contact
S Multiple operator styles: side rotary, Wobble Stick and . . . . . . . . . page 5--80
wobble stick, cat whisker, adjustable Cat Whisker x Spring Return
top push and top or side push with or
without rollers

Limit Switches
802X Lever Type x Spring Return
Range of Operation
Travel to Travel to
Operate Contacts Operate Contacts
D D No Contact
Max Travel Max Travel Max Travel D
Movement
D
D
D D
D D

Reset Contacts Reset Contacts Reset Contacts
Lever Operation When Levers Lever Operation When 802T-W7 and W8 Switch
Except 802T-W7 and W8 Are Used “One-Way” Levers Are Used Without Lever
Product Selection—Standard and Neutral Position Models

Torque to Travel to Travel to Cat. No.
Lever Movement vs. Contact Operation (Max) Contacts (Max) Travel Contacts (Max) NEMA 4 NEMA 7 and 9
0.34 NSm
16.5q 43q 8q 802X- A4 802X- A7
1 2 1 2
(3 lbSin)
Clockwise or 1 2
6q 50q 3q — 802X- H7
(4.5 lbSin)
0.34 NSm
16.5q 43q 8q 802X-- A14 802X-- A17
1 2 1 2
(3.5 lbSin)
Clockwise 1 2
3 4 3 4 3 4 0.51 NSm
6q 50q 3q — 802X-- H17
(4.5 lbSin)
0.34 NSm
16.5q 43q 8q 802X-- A24 802X-- A27
(3.5 lbSin)
3 4 3 4 3 4 0.51 NSm
6q 50q 3q — 802X-- H27
(4.5 lbSin)
Clockwise 1 2 1 2 802X-- L14 802X-- L17

3 4 3 4 0.45 NSm
20q 91q 11q
(4 lbSin)
Counterclockwise 1 2 1 2 802X-- L24 802X-- L27
3 4 3 4
Neutral Position Switch
with Normally Open 1 2 1 2 1 2 0.25 NSm
12q 53q 6q — 802X-- NP7
Contacts (2.25 lbSin)
3 4 3 4 3 4
13.46
(0.53) 26.16 19
48.51 (1.03)
(1.91) (0.75)
22.35
(0.88)
138.18 23.88 Approximate Shipping Wt.
(5.44) (0.94) 0.9 kg (2 lbs)
(2) 1/4--20
Tapped Holes for 8.64 Mounting Hole Dimensions
Rear Mounting 104.9 (0.34)
(4.13) 2—0.265 Dia. through hole with 0.500
87.38 Dia. x 0.25 in. deep C’Bore for front
2--6.73 (0.265) (3.44)
Dia. Holes for mounting.
Front Mounting 2—1/4-- 20 x 0.56 in. deep Tapped
holes for rear mounting.
19 50.8 19
Note: For operating head and lever assembly 38.1 (0.75) (2.19) (0.75) 2—1/4-- 20 x 0.5 in. deep Tapped holes
dimensions not shown, see page 5--130. (1.5) for side mounting.
Conduit pipe opening 1/2 in. NPT. 57.15
(2.25)

5--75
Limit Switches
802X Lever Type x Maintained Contact
Range of Operation
Max Travel
Travel to
Reset Contacts
D
D
D
Travel to
Operate Contacts
Switch Without Lever
Product Selection
Cat. No.
Torque to Travel to Operate Max Travel to Reset
Lever Movement vs. Contact Operation Operate (Max) Contacts (Max) Travel Contacts (Max) NEMA 4 NEMA 7 & 9

1 2 1 2 70q 84q 35q 802X-- AM4 802X- AM7
3 4 3 4
13.46
(0.53) 19
48.51
(0.75)
(1.91)
26.16
(1.03)
22.35
(0.88)
23.88
138.18 (0.94)
(5.44)
8.64 Approximate Shipping Wt.
(0.34) 0.9 kg (2 lbs)
104.9
(4.13) 87.38
(3.44)
2--6.73 (0.265)
Dia. Holes for
Front Mounting Mounting Hole Dimensions
2—0.265 Dia. through hole with 0.500
19 50.8 19 Dia. x 0.25 in. deep C’Bore for front
38.1 (0.75) (2.19) (0.75) mounting.
(1.5) 57.15 (2) 1/4--20
Tapped Holes for Rear 2—1/4-- 20 x 0.56 in. deep Tapped
Note: For operating head and lever assembly (2.25)
Mounting holes for rear mounting.
dimensions not shown, see page 5--130.
Conduit pipe opening 1/2 in. NPT. 2—1/4-- 20 x 0.5 in. deep Tapped holes
for side mounting.

Limit Switches
802X Push Type x Spring Return
Range of Operation
Travel to
Operate Contacts
Travel to
Reset Contacts D
Max Travel
Top Push Rod Adjustable Side Push Rod Top Push Roller Side Push Roller
Top Push Rod
Product Selection
Contact Operation Travel to Cat. No.
Force to Travel to Reset
Operate Operate Max Contacts NEMA
Operator Type Normal Operated (Max) Contacts (Max) Travel (Max) NEMA 4 7 and 9
Top Push Rod 15.6 N 5.1 mm 0.8 mm 802X-- B4 802X- B7
1.9 mm
Adjustable Top Push Rod (3.5 lbs) (0.075 in.) (0.202 in.) (0.030 in.) 802X-- BA4 802X-- BA7
1 2 1 2
3 4 3 4 20.0 N 3.2 mm 5.5 mm 1.5 mm
Side Push Rod 802X-- C4 802X-- C7
(4.5 lbs) (0.125 in.) (0.218 in.) (0.057 in.)
15.6 N 1.9 mm 5.1 mm 0.8 mm

Top Push Roller 802X-- D4 802X-- D7
(3.5 lbs) (0.075 in.) (0.202 in.) (0.030 in.)
1 2 1 2
Side Push Vertical Roller 20.0 N 5.5 mm 1.5 mm 802X-- K4 802X-- K7
3 4 3 4 3.2 mm
Side Push Horizontal Roller (4.5 lbs) (0.125 in.) (0.218 in.) (0.057 in.) 802X-- K14 802X-- K17
9.65 19
(0.38) (0.75)
43.69
(1.72)
22.35
(0.88)
170.18 23.88
(6.70) (0.94)
8.64
104.9
(0.34)
(4.13)
Approximate Shipping Wt.
87.38 0.9 kg (2 lbs)
(3.44)
2--6.73 (0.265) Mounting Hole Dimensions

Dia. Holes for
Front Mounting 2—0.265 Dia. through hole with 0.500
Dia. x 0.25in deep C’Bore for front
2.09
mounting.
19
Note: For operating head and lever assembly 38.1 (0.75) (53.09) 2—1/4-- 20 x 0.56in deep Tapped holes
dimensions not shown, see page 5--130. (1.5) (2) 1/4--20 for rear mounting.
Conduit pipe opening 1/2 in. NPT. 57.15 Tapped Holes for Rear Mounting
(2.15) 2—1/4-- 20 x 0.5in deep Tapped holes
for side mounting.

5--77
Limit Switches
802X Push Type x Spring Return

19
7.9 19 36.83 (0.75)
(0.31) (0.75) (1.45)
13.46
23.11 (0.53)
67.56
81.79 (0.91)
(2.66) Max
(3.22) 26.16 7.87
53.09 (1.03)
75.44 (2.09) Min (0.31)
22.35
(2.97)
(0.88)
13.46 (0.53)
22.35 162.05 23.88
(0.88) (6.38) (0.94)
194.56
(7.66) 8.64
Max 104.9 (0.34)
(4.13) 87.38
23.88 (3.44)
188.21 (0.94)
(7.41)
8.64
Max (0.34)
104.9 87.38 2--6.73 (0.265)
(4.13) (3.44) Dia. Holes for
Front Mounting
19
(2) 6.73
38.1 (0.75) (2) 1/4--20
(0.265)
(1.5) Tapped Holes for Rear Mounting
Dia. Holes 57.15
for (2.15)
Front Mtg.
19 2.09
(0.75) (2) 1/4--20 (53.09) Bulletin 802X
38.1 Side Push Rod Type
(1.5) Tapped Holes for
57.15 Rear Mounting
(2.15)
Bulletin 802X
Adjustable Top Push Rod Type 46.74 19
19 (1.84) (0.75)
(0.75)
12.7
(0.50) 12.7
(0.50)
57.91 26.16
13.46 (1.03)
(2.28)
(0.53) 22.35
(0.88)
13.46
(0.53) 22.35
(0.88) 162.05 23.88
(6.38)
(0.94)
104.9 8.64
104.9 23.88 (0.34)
(0.94) (4.13)
(4.13) 87.38
8.64 (3.44)
(0.34)
87.38
(3.44) 2--6.73 (0.265)
2--6.73 (0.265) 170.69
(6.72) Dia. Holes for
Dia. Holes for
Front Mounting
Front Mounting
19
38.1 (0.75)
(2) 1/4--20
(1.5)
57.15 Tapped Holes for
19 2.09 (2.15) Rear Mounting
38.1 (0.75) (53.09)
(1.5) 57.15 (2) 1/4--20
Tapped Holes for Rear Mounting Bulletin 802X
(2.15)
Side Push Roller Type
Bulletin 802X
Top Push Roller Type Mounting Hole Dimensions
2—0.265 Dia. through hole with 0.500 Dia. x 0.25 in. deep
Approximate Shipping Wt. 0.9 kg (2 lbs) C’Bore for front mounting.
2—1/4-- 20 x 0.56 in. deep Tapped holes for rear mounting.
Note: For operating head and lever assembly dimensions not shown, see page 5--130.
Conduit pipe opening 1/2 in. NPT. 2—1/4-- 20 x 0.5 in. deep Tapped holes for side mounting.

Limit Switches
802X Push Type x Maintained Contact
Range of Operation
Max Travel
Normal Operated
Travel to Travel to
Operate Contacts Operate Contacts
Side Push Rod
Product Selection
Contact Operation Travel to Cat. No.
Force to Operate Max Travel to Reset
Operator Type Normal Operated Operate (Max) Contacts Travel Contacts (Max) NEMA 4 NEMA 7 and 9
4.81 mm 5.96 mm 5.30 mm
Side Push Rod 1 2 1 2 35.49 N (8 lbs) (0.192 in.) (0.209 in.) — 802X-- CM7
(0.235 in.)
3 4 3 4 Nominal Nominal
48.51 1.52
(1.91) (0.06)
26.16
(1.03) 13.46
(0.53) 22.35
(0.88)
23.88
(0.94)
104.9 157.23
(4.13) (6.19) 8.64
(0.34)
87.38
(3.44)
19
(0.75)
2--6.73 (0.265)
Dia. Holes for
Front Mounting
19 53.09
(0.75) (2.09)
38.1
(1.5)
57.15 (2) 1/4in 20 Tapped Holes
(2.25) for Rear Mounting
Note: For operating head and lever assembly dimensions not shown, see page 5--130. Conduit pipe opening 1/2 in. NPT.

5--79
Limit Switches
802X Push Type x Wobble Stick and Cat Whisker x Spring Return
Range of Operation
Travel to
Operate Contacts
D Max Travel
D
Travel to
Reset Contacts
Travels are measured at rigid

section of stick or whisker. Wobble Stick
Cat Whisker
Product Selection
Contact Operation Torque to Travel to Cat. No.

Operate Operate Max Travel to Reset
Operator Type Normal Operated (Max) Contacts (Max) Travel Contacts (Max) NEMA 4 NEMA 7 & 9
Nylon Wobble Stick 0.51N.m 802X-- WS4 802X-- WS7
1 2 1 2 9q 10q 4q
Wire Cat Whisker 3 4 3 4 (4.5lb in.) 802X-- WS14 802X-- WS17
These switches should be mounted in such a way that the wobble stick will not be deflected beyond the “Maximum Travel” position, as this could cause undesirable repetition of contact action
on rebound.

6.35 Dia.
3.30
(0.25)
(0.13)
447.80
263.65 (17.63)
(10.38) 19
19
(0.75) 48.3 (0.75)
13.46 (1.9) 13.46
(0.53) (0.53)
22.35 8.64
(0.88) (0.34)
23.88 23.88
(0.94) (0.94)
104.9 8.64
(4.13) (0.34) 87.38 104.9 8.64
(3.44) (4.13) (0.34) 87.38
2--6.73 (0.265) (3.44)
2--6.73 (0.265)
Dia. Holes for Dia. Holes
Front Mounting for Front Mounting
19 53.09
19 2.09
38.1 (0.75) (2.09)
38.1 (0.75) (53.09)
(1.5) 57.15 (2) 1/4in 20
Tapped Holes for (1.5) 57.15 (2) 1/4--20
(2.25)
Rear Mounting (2.15) Tapped Holes for Rear Mounting
802X-- WS4 and 802X-- WS7 Bulletin 802X Wire Wobble Stick Type
Note: For operating head and lever assembly dimensions not shown, see page 5--130. Conduit pipe opening 1/2 in. NPT.

Limit Switches
802XR
Sealed Contact Hazardous Location Switches
Specifications
Enclosure Rating NEMA 7 and 9
Certifications UL Listed and CSA Certified
Ambient Temperature [C (F)] - 29}+121q (-- 20}+250q) except devices with wobble stick operators.
Wobble stick models are rated from - 18}+54q (0}+130q)
AC Contact Rating (Maximum per Pole, 50 or 60Hz, Same Polarity)

Rating Carrying
Designation Max Voltage Make Break Current Make Break
120 30 3.00 5A 3600 360
240 15 1.50 5A 3600 360
B600
480 7.5 0.75 5A 3600 360
600 6 0.60 5A 3600 360
Description DC Contact Rating (Maximum per Pole)

Bulletin 802XR NEMA Type 7 and 9 NEMA Rating Designation Voltage Range Current Rating
limit switches for hazardous locations 115-- 125 1.1 A
are designed to operate in atmospheres P300
and locations defined as Class I, 230-- 250 0.55 A
Groups B, C or D or Class II, Groups E, Note: Temperature range below 0qC (+32qF) is based on the absence of freezing moisture or water.
F or G in the National Electrical Code.
Typical applications for this switch
include refineries, distilleries, grain Features Sealed Contact
elevators and flour mills. For Class I, S Class I, Groups B, C, and D or Lever Type x Spring Return page 5--82
Division 2 locations, a Bulletin 802R Class II, Groups E, F and G Lever Type x . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5--83
limit switch may also be used (see page Maintained Contact
5--34). S Side rotary, wobble stick, adjustable
top and top or side push styles with Push Type x Spring Return . page 5--84
As an added protection, the contact is and without rollers
hermetically sealed in a glass envelope Cat Whisker x
Spring Return . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5--86
for excellent contact reliability even in
contaminated atmospheres. This switch
is Programmable Controller compatible
(24V and above) and is pilot duty rated
NEMA B600 for AC and NEMA P300 for
DC as shown in the specification.

5--81
Limit Switches
802XR Lever Type x Spring Return
Range of Operation
Travel to Travel to
Operate Contact Operate Contact
Max Travel D Max Travel D No Contact
D
Max Travel D Movement
D
D D
D D

Reset Contact Reset Contact Reset Contact
Lever Operation With Lever Operation With W7 and W8

Standard Levers “One-Way” Levers Switch Without Lever
Product Selection
Torque to Operate Travel to Operate Max Travel to Reset
Lever Movement (Max) Contact (Max) Travel Contact (Max) Contact Type Cat. No.
N.O. 802XR- AF7
0.34 NSm (3 lbSin) 16q 42q 9q
N.C. 802XR-- AC7
Clockwise or Counterclockwise
N.O. 802XR-- HF7
0.51 NSm (4.5 lbSin) 7q 53q 3.5q
N.C. 802XR-- HC7
N.O. 802XR-- A3F7
0.167 NSm (1.5 lbSin) 17q 42q 10q
N.C. 802XR-- A3C7
Clockwise
N.O. 802XR-- H1F7
0.51 NSm (4.5 lbSin) 7q 50q 3.5q
N.C. 802XR-- H1C7
N.O. 802XR-- A4F7
0.167 NSm (1.5 lbSin) 17q 42q 10q
N.C. 802XR-- A4C7
Counterclockwise
N.O. 802XR-- H2F7
0.51 NSm (4.5 lbSin) 7q 50q 3.5q
N.C. 802XR-- H2C7
Clockwise N.O. 802XR-- L1F7
Lever cannot move counterclockwise N.C. 802XR-- L1C7
0.45 NSm (4 lbSin) 20q 91q 11q
Counterclockwise N.O. 802XR-- L2F7
Lever cannot move clockwise N.C. 802XR-- L2C7

19
13.46 (0.75)
26.16
(0.53)
(1.03)
48.51
(1.91)
22.35
Approximate Shipping Wt. 0.9 kg (2 lbs) (0.88)
23.88
138.18 (0.94)
(5.44)
8.64
(0.34)
104.9 87.38 Mounting Hole Dimensions
(4.13) (3.44)
2—0.265 Dia. through hole with 0.500
2--6.73 (0.265)
Dia. Holes for Dia. C’Bore 0.25 in. deep for front
Front Mounting mounting.
2—1/4-- 20 Tapped holes 0.56 in. deep
19 50.8
(0.75) 38.1
for rear mounting.
Note: For operating head and lever assembly (2.0) 19
dimensions not shown, see page 5--130. (1.5) (2) 1/4--20 (0.75) 2—1/4-- 20 Tapped holes 0.5 in. deep
Conduit pipe opening 1/2 in. NPT. 57.15 Tapped Holes for for side mounting.
(2.25)
Rear Mounting

Limit Switches
802XR Lever Type x Maintained Contact
Range of Operation
Max Travel
Travel to
Reset Contact
D
D
D
Travel to
Operate Contact
Switch
Without Lever
Product Selection
Torque to Operate Travel to Operate Travel to Reset Contact
Lever Movement (Max) Contact (Max) Max Travel Contact (Max) Type Cat. No.
N.O. 802XR-- AMF7
Counterclockwise 0.25 NSm (2.25 lbSin) 70q 84q 35q
N.C. 802XR-- AMC7

19
(0.75)
13.46
(0.53)
48.51
(1.91) 26.16
(1.03)
22.35
(0.88)
138.18 23.88
(5.44) (0.94)
104.9 8.64 87.38

(4.13) (0.34) (3.44)
Mounting Hole Dimensions

2--6.73 (0.265) 2—0.265 Dia. through hole with
Dia Holes for 0.500 Dia. C’Bore 0.25 in. deep for
Front Mounting front mounting.
2—1/4-- 20 Tapped holes 0.56 in.
Approximate Shipping Wt. 0.9 kg (2 lbs) 19 50.8 19
(0.75) (219) (0.75) deep for rear mounting.
38.1
Note: For operating head and lever assembly (1.5) 57.15 (2) 1/4--20 2—1/4-- 20 Tapped holes 0.5 in.
dimensions not shown, see page 5--130. (2.25) Tapped Holes for deep for side mounting.
Conduit pipe opening 1/2 in. NPT. Rear Mounting

5--83
Limit Switches
802XR Push Type x Spring Return
Range of Operation
Travel to
Operate Contact
Travel to
Reset Contact
D
Max Travel Top Push Rod Adjustable Top Side Push Rod Top Push Roller Side Push Roller
Push Rod
Product Selection
Force to Operate Travel to Operate Travel to Reset
Operator Type (Max) Contact (Max) Max Travel Contact (Max) Contact Type Cat. No.
N.O. 802XR-- BF7
Top Push Rod 13.4 N (3 lb)
N.C. 802XR-- BC7
1.75 mm (0.069 in.) 5.1 mm (0.202 in.) 0.71 mm (0.028 in.)
Adjustable Top Push N.O. 802XR-- BAF7
15.6 N (3.5 lb)
Rod N.C. 802XR-- BAC7
N.O. 802XR-- CF7
Side Push Rod 20.0 N (4.5 lb) 3.2 mm (0.125 in.) 5.5 mm (0.218 in.) 1.5 mm (0.057 in.)
N.C. 802XR-- CC7
N.O. 802XR-- DF7
Top Push Roller 15.6 N (3.5 lb) 1.75 mm (0.069 in.) 5.1 mm (0.202 in.) 0.71 mm (0.028 in.)
N.C. 802XR-- DC7
Side Push Vertical N.O. 802XR-- KF7

Roller N.C. 802XR-- KC7
20.0 N (4.5 lb) 3.2 mm (0.125 in.) 5.5 mm (0.0218 in.) 1.5 mm (0.057 in.)
Side Push Horizontal N.O. 802XR-- K1F7
Roller N.C. 802XR-- K1C7

19
9.65 (0.75)
(0.38)
43.69
(1.72)
22.35
(0.88)
170.18 23.88
(6.70) (0.94)
104.9 8.64
(4.13) (0.34)
87.38
(3.44)
2--6.73 (0.265) Mounting Hole Dimensions

Dia. Holes for
Dia. C’Bore 0.25 in. deep for front
Approximate Shipping Wt. 0.9 kg (2 lb) mounting.
19 53.09
(0.75) (2) 1/4--20 (2.09) 2—1/4-- 20 Tapped holes 0.56 in. deep
Note: For operating head and lever assembly 38.1 Tapped Holes for
(1.5) for rear mounting.
dimensions not shown, see page 5--130. 57.15 Rear Mounting
Conduit pipe opening 1/2 in. NPT. (2.15) 2—1/4-- 20 Tapped holes 0.5 in. deep
for side mounting.

Limit Switches
802XR Push Type x Spring Return

7.9 19 36.83 19
(0.31) (0.75) (1.45) (0.75)
13.46
23.02 (0.53)
67.56 (0.91)
81.79 (2.66) Max 26.16
(3.22) 53.09 7.87
(1.03)
75.44 (2.09) Min (0.31) 8.64
(2.97) (0.34)
22.35 162.05 23.88

(0.88) (6.38) (0.94)
194.56
(7.66) 8.64
Max 104.9 (0.34)
87.38
23.88 (4.13) (3.44)
188.21 (0.94)
(7.41) 2--6.73 (0.265)
8.64
Max (0.34) Dia. Holes for
87.38
(3.44) Front Mounting
104.9
(4.13)
19
(2) 6.73 38.1 (0.75) (2) 1/4--20
(0.265) (1.5) 57.15 Tapped Holes for Rear Mounting
Dia. Holes (2.15)
for
Front Mtg.
19 53.09 Bulletin 802XR Side Push Rod Type
(0.75) (2) 1/4--20 (2.09)
38.1
(1.5) Tapped Holes for
57.15 Rear Mounting
(2.15)
Bulletin 802XR Adjustable Top Push Rod Type 46.74 19
(1.84) (0.75)
19
(0.75)
12.7
12.7
(0.50)
(0.50) 26.16
13.46 (1.03)
57.91 (0.53) 22.35
(2.28) (0.88)
13.46 162.05
(0.53) 22.35 23.88
(6.38)
(0.88) (0.94)
104.9 8.64
(4.13) (0.34)
170.69 23.88 87.38
(6.72) (0.94) (3.44)
104.9 8.64
(4.13) 87.38
(0.34) (3.44) 2--6.73 (0.265)
Dia. Holes for
2--6.73 (0.265) Front Mounting
Dia. Holes for
Front Mounting
19
38.1 (0.75)
(2) 1/4--20
(1.5)
57.15 Tapped Holes for
(2.15) Rear Mounting
19 53.09
38.1 (0.75) (2.09) Bulletin 802XR Side Push Roller Type
(1.5) 57.15 (2) 1/4--20
(2.15) Tapped Holes for Rear Mounting
Mounting Hole Dimensions
Bulletin 802XR Top Push Roller Type 2—0.265 Dia. through hole with 0.500 Dia.
C’Bore 0.25 in. deep for front mounting.
Approximate Shipping Wt. 0.9 kg (2 lb) 2—1/4-- 20 Tapped holes 0.56 in. deep for rear
mounting.
Note: For operating head and lever assembly dimensions not shown, see page 5--130.
Conduit pipe opening 1/2 in. NPT.
2—1/4-- 20 Tapped holes 0.5 in. deep for side
mounting.

5--85
Limit Switches
802XR Cat Whisker x Spring Return
Range of Operation
Travel to
Operate Contact
D Max Travel
D
D
Travel to
Reset Contact
Travels Are Measured at

Rigid Section of Operator
Cat Whisker
Product Selection
Torque to Operate Travel to Operate Travel to Reset
Operator Type (Max) Contact (Max) Max Travel Contact (Max) Contact Type Cat. No.
N.O. 802XR-- WS1F7
Wire Cat Whisker 0.51 NSm (4.5 lbSft) 11q 11q 5q
N.C. 802XR-- WS1C7
These switches should be mounted in such a way that the operator will not be deflected beyond the “Maximum Travel” position, as this could cause undesirable repetition of contact action on
rebound.

3.30
(0.13)
447.80
(17.63)
13.46 19
(0.53) (0.75)
8.64
(0.34)
23.88
(0.94)
104.9 8.64
(4.13) (0.34) 87.38
2--6.73 (0.265) (3.44) Mounting Hole Dimensions
Dia. Holes for
Dia. C’Bore 0.25 in. deep for front
Approximate Shipping Wt. 0.9 kg ( 2lb) mounting.
19 53.09 2—1/4-- 20 Tapped holes 0.56 in. deep

Note: For operating head and lever assembly for rear mounting.
38.1 (0.75) (2.09)
dimensions not shown, see page 5--130.
Conduit pipe opening 1/2 in. NPT. (1.5) 57.15 (2) 1/4--20 2—1/4-- 20 Tapped holes 0.5 in. deep
(2.15) Topped Holes for Rear Mounting for side mounting.

Limit Switches
802B Compact, Precision and Small Precision
Compact Precision Small Precision
Description Specifications
Bulletin 802B consists of different body Compact Precision Small Precision
styles: compact, precision and small Certifications UL Listed, CSA UL Listed, CSA Certified UL Recognized, CSA
precision. Each style has been Certified and CE and CE Marked for all Certified and CE
designed to withstand the rugged Marked for all applicable directives Marked for all applicable
environments that industrial applicable directives directives
applications demand. Each style utilizes Enclosure Rating NonBooted: NEMA 1 NEMA 1, 3, 4, 6, 13 and
industry standard mounting dimensions NEMA 1,3,4,6,12,13 and IP60 IP67
and operating characteristics. The 802B and IP67 Booted: NEMA 1,3,4, and
family of limit switches can be mounted IP65
in areas that traditional NEMA limit Mechanical Life Approx. 10,000,000 Approx. 10,000,000 Approx. 10,000,000
switches can not, due to their size and operations operations operations
mounting options. Electrical Life Approx. 200,000 Approx. 500,000 Approx. 500,000
operations (3 A 250 V operations (15 A 250 V operations (10 A 250 V
The 802B compact limit switch uses a AC, resistive load) AC, resistive load) AC, resistive load)
die-cast housing with a 3m prewired
cable. This limit switch is available with Operating Speed
13 unique head configurations. Each Top Push 0.1 mm}0.5 m per 0.01 mm}0.5 m per 0.05 mm}0.5 m per
head style can be ordered as a second second second
standard model, LED indicator model,
Side Rotary 1 mm}1 m per second — —
or as a low current model. The compact
limit switch maintains NEMA 6 and IP67 Lever Type — 0.02 mm}0.5 m per —
enclosure ratings by utilizing a triple second
seal construction. Operating Frequency
Mechanical 120 operations/minute 120 operations/minute 120 operations/minute
The 802B precision limit switch uses a
die-cast housing with 1/2 NPT conduit Electrical 30 operations/minute 20 operations/minute 20 operations/minute
entry. This limit switch is available with 5 Operating Temperature - 10}70q (14}158q) - 10}80q (14}176q) - 10}80q (14}176q)
unique head configurations. Each [C (F)] with no icing with no icing with no icing
different head is available as standard Short Circuit Protection Quick blow fuse Quick blow fuse suitable Quick blow fuse
or with a rubber boot for additional suitable for rated for rated current is suitable for rated
sealing. Two different mounting styles current is recommended current is
are available. Side mount or flange recommended recommended
rubber boot for additional sealing. Two Contact Type SPDT Form C SPDT Form C SPDT Form C
different mounting styles are available:
side mount or flange mount. Life expectancy has been calculated at an operating temperature of 5}35_C (41}95_F) and an operating humidity of
40}70%.
The 802B small precision limit switch is Life expectancy has been calculated at an operating temperature of 20_C (68_F) and an operating humidity of 65%.
similar to the 802B Precision limit switch
with some additional features. This Features Style
switch offers an enclosure rating of
S Rugged die-cast housing Compact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5--88
NEMA 6 and IP67 which is achieved by Precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5--97
S Industry standard dimensions
a rubber cable gland sealing the control
cable entry. This limit switch offers 12 S Compact size Small Precision . . . . . . . . . . page 5--105
different head configurations, including
S Multiple mounting options
some that are unique to this product
offering. S Wide range of operating voltage and
current ratings

5--87
Limit Switches
802B Compact, Precision and Small Precision
Specifications
Compact
Inductive Load
Non-Inductive Motor Load Inrush Current
Rated Voltage Resistive Load Inductive N/O N/C N/O N/C
Standard Models
125V AC 5A 3A 1.3 A 2.5 A
250V AC 5A 2A 0.8 A 1.5 A
8V DC 5A 5A 3A 3A
14V DC 5A 4A 3A 3A
30V DC 4A 3A 3A 3A
125V DC 0.4 A 0.4 A 0.05 A 0.05 A
250V DC 0.2 A 0.2 A 0.03 A 0.03 A
AC LED Models
125V AC 5A 3A 1.3 A 2.5 A 10 A max 20 A max
125V DC 0.4 A 0.4 A 0.05 A 0.05 A
DC LED Models
30V DC 4A 3A 3A 3A
Low Current Models
125V AC 0.1 A
8V DC 0.1 A
—
14V DC 0.1 A
30V DC 0.1 A
UL/CSA Approved Ratings
NEMA Rating A
Designation Rated Voltage Make Break Continuous Current Volt Amps
120V AC 30 3
B300 5 3,600 360
240V AC 15 1.5
AC LED Versions
B150 120V AC 30 3 5 3,600 360
Leakage Current for LED Models
Voltage Leakage Current Resistance
AC LED 125 68 k:
1.7 mA
DC LED 30 15 k:
Precision
Inductive Load
Non-Inductive Motor Load Inrush Current UL/CSA Approved Ratings
Rated Voltage Resistive Load Inductive N/O N/C N/O N/C Rated Voltage Current Horsepower
125V AC 15 A 15 A 2.5 A 5A 120V AC 15 A
1/8 HP
250V AC 15 A 2.5 A 1.5 A 3A 250V AC 15 A
1/4 HP
480V AC 10A 1.5 A 0.75 A 1.5 A 15 A max 30 A max 480V AC 15 A
125V DC 0.5 A 0.5 A 0.05 A 125V DC 0.5 A
—
250V DC 0.25 A 0.25 A 0.03 A 250V DC 0.25 A
Small Precision
Inductive Load UL/CSA Approved Ratings
Motor Load Inrush Current NEMA A

Non-Inductive Rating
Rated Resistive Designa- Rated Continuous
Voltage Load Inductive N/O N/C N/O N/C tion Voltage Make Break Current Volt Amps
125V AC 10A 10 A 2.5 A 5A 15 A max 30 A max 120V AC 60 6
A300 10 7,200 720
250V AC 10A 10 A 1.5 A 3A 240V AC 30 3
8V DC 10A 6A 2.5 A 5A
14V DC 10A 6A 2.5 A 5A
30V DC 6A 5A 2.5 A 5A
125V DC 0.5 A 0.05 A 0.05 A
250V DC 0.25 A 0.03 A 0.03 A

Limit Switches
802B Compact
Small Metal Body
Rotary Arm Center Rotary Wobble Stick

Arm
Product Selection
Reference Value Cat. No.
Pre-leaded Quick-Disconnect
Head Type Operate Operate Max Travel Reset Output Type
802B-- CSAAXSXD4
Standard 802B- CSAAXSXC3
802B-- CSAAXSXR4
0.216 NSm AC LED 802B-- CSAAXSLC3 802B-- CSAAXSLR4
Rotary Arm 25_ 70_ 3_
(2 lbSin.)
DC LED 802B-- CSDAXSLC3 802B-- CSDAXSLD4
Low Voltage/Current 802B-- CSDAXSXC3 —
Standard 802B-- CSAA2XSXC3 —
Center Rotary 0.216 NSm AC LED 802B-- CSAA2XSLC3 —

10 r3_ 65_ 4_
Arm (2 lbSin.) DC LED 802B-- CSDA2XSLC3 —
Low Voltage/Current 802B-- CSDA2XSXC3 —
802B-- CSACXSXD4
Standard 802B- CSACXSXC3
802B-- CSACXSXR4
18_ 11_
0.118 NSm AC LED 802B-- CSACXSLC3 —
Wobble Stick 15_ (Nominal (Nominal
(1.04 lbSin.)
Value) Value)
DC LED 802B-- CSDCXSLC3 —
Low Voltage/Current 802B-- CSDCXSXC3 —
Wiring
Pre-leaded Models
COM NO NC Ground Brown
Black
Black Blue Brown Green/Yellow Blue
Quick-Disconnect Models
AC QD Pin-- out: DC QD Pin-- out:
Pin 1 = Common Pin 1 = N/O
Pin 2 = N/O Pin 2 = Common
Pin 3 = N/C Pin 3 = Grnd.
Pin 4 = Grnd. Male Receptacle Pin 4 = N/C Male Receptacle
All compact models
For quick-disconnect versions the last two digits indicate connector type: are available with
802B--xxxxxxxD4 Indicates a 4-pin DC micro style connector LED.
802B--xxxxxxxR4 Indicates a 4-pin AC micro style connector
QD is on a 6 inch pigtail.
An appropriate female connector with cable is available in Connection Systems.

4--pin micro DC = (889D--F4AC--2) on page 8--16
4--pin micro DC = (889R--F4AEA--2) on page 8--28

5--89
Limit Switches
802B Compact
Small Metal Body

17.5 (0.69) Dia.
x 7.0 (0.28) 50 (1.97)
44 (1.73)
30.2
(1.19)
102.7 31.5 38.0

(4.04) (1.24) (1.49)
7
(0.28)
11.4 18.9
(0.45) (0.74)
7.5
(0.3)
8
(0.31) 65.0
(2.56)
23.0 2
(0.91) (0.08)
2 2 25 (0.98) 17.5 (0.69) Dia.

1.4 1.5
(0.08) (0.08) x 7.0 (0.28)
(0.06) (0.06)
25
34 (1.34) (0.98)
16.0 102.7
40 (1.57)
(0.63) (4.04)
Rotary Arm 7 56.9

(0.28) (2.24)
11.4
(0.45) 18.9
7.5 (0.74)
(0.3)
8
(0.31)
23.0 2 37.0
3.2 (0.13) Dia. (1.46)
104.0 38.0 (0.91) (0.08)
(4.09) (1.5) 6.6 (0.26) Dia.
2 1.5
(0.08) 34 (0.06)
42.0 (1.34) 1.4
(1.65) (0.06)
40 (1.57) 16.0
4.5 (0.63)
(0.18) Center Rotary Arm
7.5
(0.3)
8 Counter Bore = 102. mm Dia
(0.31)
Mounting Hole = 5.1 mm Dia
23.0
49.0 (0.91) 2 Counter Bore Depth = 5.8 mm
(1.93) (0.08)
Mounting Hole Depth = 10.1 mm
1.5 Cable Dia. = 8.5 mm

2 (0.06)
(0.08)
25 1.4
(0.98) (0.06)
34 (1.34) 16.0
40 (1.57) (0.63)
Wobble Stick

Limit Switches
802B Compact
Small Metal Body
Top Push
Top Push Top Push Bevel Top Push Roller Cross Roller
Product Selection
Cat. No.
Force to Travel to Travel to
Head Type Operate Operate Max Travel Reset Output Type Pre-leaded Quick-Disconnect
802B-- CSABXSXD4
Standard 802B- CSABXSXC3
802B-- CSABXSXR4
11.77 N 1.8 mm 5 mm 0.2 mm AC LED 802B-- CSABXSLC3 802B-- CSABXSLR4
Top Push
(2.65 lb) (0.071 in.) (0.197 in.) (0.008 in.)
DC LED 802B-- CSDBXSLC3 802B-- CSDBXSLD4
Low Voltage/Current 802B-- CSDBXSXC3 —
Standard 802B-- CSAB1XSXC3 —
Top Push 11.77 N 1.8 mm 5 mm 0.2 mm AC LED 802B-- CSAB1XSLC3 —

Bevel (2.65 lb) (0.071 in.) (0.197 in.) (0.008 in.) DC LED 802B-- CSDB1XSLC3 —
Low Voltage/Current 802B-- CSDB1XSXC3 —
802B-- CSADXSXD4
Standard 802B- CSADXSXC3
802B-- CSADXSXR4
Top Push 11.77 N 1.8 mm 5 mm 0.2 mm AC LED 802B-- CSADXSLC3 802B-- CSADXSLR4
Roller (2.65 lb) (0.071 in.) (0.197 in.) (0.008 in.)
DC LED 802B-- CSDDXSLC3 802B-- CSDDXSLD4
Low Voltage/Current 802B-- CSDDXSXC3 —
802B-- CSAD1XSXD4
Standard 802B- CSAD1XSXC3
802B-- CSAD1XSXR4
Top Push 11.77 N 1.8 mm 5 mm 0.2 mm AC LED 802B-- CSAD1XSLC3 802B-- CSAD1XSLR4
Cross Roller (2.65 lb) (0.071 in.) (0.197 in.) (0.008 in.)
DC LED 802B-- CSDD1XSLC3 802B-- CSDD1XSLD4
Low Voltage/Current 802B-- CSDD1XSXC3 —
Wiring
Pre-leaded Models
Black
All compact models
QD ia on a 6 in. pigtail.
5--91
Limit Switches
802B Compact
Small Metal Body

10 (0.39) Dia.
1.5 2.8 (0.11)
10 (0.39) Dia. 4.5 (0.06)
1.8 (0.07) 2.8
(0.18) (0.11)
28.5
(1.12) 7.0
15.7 (0.28)
(0.62) 7.5
(0.3) 7.5
8 (0.3)
8
54.2 (0.31)
67.0 (0.31)
(2.13) 51.5
23.0 (2.64) (2.03)
23.0
(0.91) 2
2 (0.91)
49.0 (0.08)
(0.08) (1.93)
2.0 2.0 1.5

(0.08) 1.5 (0.08) (0.06)
(0.06)
1.4
25 (0.06)
25 1.4 (0.98) 16.0
(0.06) 34 (1.34)
(0.98) (0.63)
34 (1.34) 16.0 40 (1.57)
40 (1.57) (0.63)
Top Push Top Push Bevel
12 (0.47) x 12 (0.47) x
5 (20) Dia. 2.8 5 (20) Dia. 2.8
1.8 (0.07) (0.11) 1.8 (0.07) (0.11)
7.0 7.0
(0.28) (0.28)
28.5 28.5
(1.12) (1.12)
7.5 7.5
(0.3) (0.3)
67.0 8 67.0 8
(2.64) (0.31) (2.64) (0.31)
23.0 23.0
(0.91) (0.91)
2 51.5 2 51.5
(0.08) (2.03) (0.08) (2.03)
2.0 1.5 2.0 1.5

(0.08) (0.06) (0.08) (0.06)
34 (1.34)
34 (1.34)
25 1.4 25 1.4
(0.98) (0.06) (0.98) (0.06)
40 (1.57) 16.0 40 (1.57) 16.0
(0.63) (0.63)
Top Push Roller Top Push Cross Roller

Limit Switches
802B Compact
Small Metal Body
Top Push Top Push Roller Top Push Cross

Panel Mount Panel Mount Roller Panel Mount
Product Selection
Head Type Force to Operate Travel to Operate Max Travel Travel to Reset Output Type Cat. No.
Standard 802B-- CPABXSXC3
Top Push Panel 11.77 N 1.8 mm 5 mm 0.2 mm AC LED 802B-- CPABXSLC3

Mount (2.65 lb) (0.071 in.) (0.197 in.) (0.008 in.) DC LED 802B-- CPDBXSLC3a.
Low Voltage/Current 802B-- CPDBXSXC3
Standard 802B-- CPADXSXC3
Top Push Roller 11.77 N 1.8 mm 5 mm 0.2 mm AC LED 802B-- CPADXSLC3

Panel Mount (2.65 lb) (0.071 in.) (0.197 in.) (0.008 in.) DC LED 802B-- CPDDXSLC3
Low Voltage/Current 802B-- CPDDXSXC3
Standard 802B-- CPAD1XSXC3
Top Push Cross 11.77 N 1.8 mm 5 mm 0.2 mm AC LED 802B-- CPAD1XSLC3

Roller Panel Mount (2.65 lb) (0.071 in.) (0.197 in.) (0.008 in.) DC LED 802B-- CPDD1XSLC3
Low Voltage/Current 802B-- CPDD1XSXC3
Wiring
Preleaded Models
Black
All compact models

are available with
LED.

5--93
Limit Switches
802B Compact
Small Metal Body

10 (0.39) Dia.
1.8 (0.07)
M14 x 1
4.5 2.8
31.2 (0.18) (0.11)
13
(1.23) (0.51)
7.5 13
(0.3) (0.51)
8
75.7 (0.31)
(2.98)
23.0 49.0
2 (0.91) (1.93)
(0.08)
1.5
2.0
(0.06)
(0.08)
12 (0.47) x
1.8 (0.07) 5 (20) Dia. 2.8
(0.11)
25 1.4
(0.98) (0.06) M14 x 1
34 (1.34) 16.0
(0.63) 4.5
40 (1.57) 36.8 (0.18) 10.5
(1.45) (0.41)
Top Push Panel Mount 7.5
13
(0.51)
(0.3)
8
(0.31)
23.0
2 (0.91) 49.0
(0.08) (1.93)
2.0 1.5
(0.08) (0.06)
12 (0.47) x
1.8 (0.07) 5 (20) Dia. 2.8
(0.11)
M14 x 1 25 1.4
4.5 (0.98) (0.06)
10.5 34 (1.34) 16.0
36.8 (0.18)
(1.45) (0.41) 40 (1.57) (0.63)
7.5 13
(0.3) (0.51)
8 Top Push Roller Panel Mount
(0.31)
23.0
2 (0.91) 49.0
(0.08) (1.93)
2.0
(0.08) 1.5
(0.06)
25
34 (1.34) (0.98) 1.4
(0.06)
40 (1.57) 16.0
(0.63)
Top Push Cross Roller Panel Mount

Limit Switches
802B Compact
Small Metal Body
Top Push Top Push Roller Top Push Cross

Booted Head Booted Head Roller Booted Head
Product Selection
Cat. No.
Force to Travel to Travel to
Head Type Operate Operate Max Travel Reset Output Type Pre-leaded Quick-Disconnect
802B-- CSABBSXD4
Standard 802B- CSABBSXC3
802B-- CSABBSXR4
Top Push 17.65 N 1.8 mm 5 mm 0.2 mm AC LED 802B-- CSABBSLC3 802B-- CSABBSLR4
Booted Head (3.97 lb) (0.071 in.) (0.197 in.) (0.008 in.)
DC LED 802B-- CSDBBSLC3 802B-- CSDBBSLD4
Low Voltage/Current 802B-- CSDBBSXC3 —
802B-- CSADBSXD4
Standard 802B-- CSADBSXC3
802B-- CSADBSXR4
Top Push
17.65 N 1.8 mm 5 mm 0.2 mm AC LED 802B-- CSADBSLC3 802B-- CSADBSLR4
Roller Booted
(3.97 lb) (0.071 in.) (0.197 in.) (0.008 in.)
Head
DC LED 802B-- CSDDBSLC3 802B-- CSDDBSLD4
Low Voltage/Current 802B-- CSDDBSXC3 —
802B-- CSAD1BSXD4
Standard 802B-- CSAD1BSXC3
802B-- CSAD1BSXR4
Top Push
17.65 N 1.8 mm 5 mm 0.2 mm AC LED 802B-- CSAD1BSLC3 802B-- CSAD1BSLR4
Cross Roller
(3.97 lb) (0.071 in.) (0.197 in.) (0.008 in.)
Booted Head
DC LED 802B-- CSDD1BSLC3 802B-- CSDD1BSLD4
Low Voltage/Current 802B-- CSDD1BSXC3 —
Wiring
Preleaded Models
Black
All compact models
QD is on a 6 in. pigtail.


5--95
Limit Switches
802B Compact
Small Metal Body

10 (0.39) Dia.
1.8 (0.07)
4.5
(0.18)
24.9
(0.98)
7.5
(0.3)
8
(0.31)
64.3
(2.53) 23.0 49.0
2 (0.91) (1.93)
(0.08)
2.0 1.5
(0.08) (0.06)
12 (0.47) x
5 (20) Dia.
25 1.4 1.8 (0.07)
(0.98) (0.06)
34 (1.34) 16.0 4.0
40 (1.57) (0.63) (0.16)
34.3
(1.35)
7.5
Top Push Sealed Head (0.3)
8
(0.31)
23.0
2 (0.91) 49.0
(0.08) (1.93)
2.0 1.5
(0.08) (0.06)
12 (0.47) x
1.8 (0.07) 5 (20) Dia.
25 1.4
4.0
(0.98) (0.06)
(0.16)
34.3 34 (1.34)
(1.35) 40 (1.57) 16.0
7.5 (0.63)
(0.3)
8 Top Push Roller Sealed Head
(0.31)
49.0
23.0
(1.93)
2 (0.91)
(0.08)
2.0 1.5
(0.08) (0.06)
25 1.4
(0.98) (0.06)
34 (1.34)
40 (1.57) 16.0
(0.63)
Top Push Cross Roller Sealed Head

Limit Switches
802B Precision
Small Metal Body
Top Push Top Push Roller Top Push Roller Lever One-Way
Cross Roller Roller Lever
Product Selection
Head Type Force to Operate Travel to Operate Max Travel Travel to Reset Mounting Style Cat. No.
0.4 mm 5.9 mm
Top Push 802B-- PSABXSX
(0.016 in.) (0.232 in.)
2.45}3.43 N 0.05 mm
Top Push Roller 802B-- PSADXSX
(0.55}0.77 lb) 0.5 mm 4.1 mm (0.002 in.)
Top Push Cross (0.020 in.) (0.161 in.) Side 802B-- PSAD1XSX
Roller
Roller Lever 802B-- PSARXSX

5.59 N 4 mm 10 mm 0.4 mm
One-Way Roller (1.28 lb) (0.157 in.) (0.394 in.) (0.016 in.) 802B-- PSAR2XSX
Lever
Wiring Diagrams
1 3 2
NC 2
Com 1

NO 3
Com N.O. N.C.

5--97
Limit Switches
802B Precision
Small Metal Body

0.4 12.7 (0.5) Dia. x 0.5 (0.02)
8.4 (0.02) 4.8 (0.19) Width
(0.33) Dia. 3.8 (0.15) 3.8 (0.15)
Dia. Holes Dia. Holes
17.0 49.7
17.0
(0.67) (0.67) 19.0 (1.96)
38.2 (0.75)
1/2-- (1.5) 1/2--
19.0
14NPT (0.75) 14NPT
23.0 25.5 23.0 25.5

(0.91) (1.0) (0.91) (1.0)
21.0 21.0
25.4 (0.83) 25.4 (1.0) 24.0 (0.94) 25.4 (0.83) 25.4 (1.0) 24.0 (0.94)
(1.0) (1.0)
86.0 (3.39) 86.0 (3.39)
802B-- PSABXSX 802B-- PSADXSX
39.7
(1.56)
19.1 (0.75) Dia. x
7.9 (0.31) Width
0.5 (0.02) 23.0
12.7 (0.5) Dia. x (0.91)
4.8 (0.19) Width
3.8 (0.15)
Dia. Holes 3.8 (0.15)
49.7 Dia. Holes
17.0 17.0
(1.96) 44.0
(0.67) (0.67)
(1.73)
1/2-- 19.0 1/2-- 19.0
14NPT (0.75) 14NPT (0.75)
23.0 25.5 25.5

(0.91) 23.0
(1.0) (1.0)
(0.91)
21.0
(0.83) 25.4 (1.0) 24.0 (0.94) 21.0 24.0 (0.94)
25.4 (0.83) 25.4 (1.0)
(1.0) 25.4
86.0 (3.39) (1.0) 86.0 (3.39)
802B-- PSD1XSX 802B-- PSARXSX
18.7 (0.74) Dia. x

9 (0.35) Width 39.7
(1.56)
40.0
(1.57)
17.0 3.8 (0.15)

Dia. Holes 44.0
(0.67) (1.73)
1/2-- 19.0
14NPT (0.75)
23.0 25.5
(0.91) (1.0)
25.4 86.0 (3.39)

(1.0)
802B-- PSAR2XSX

Limit Switches
802B Precision
Small Metal Body
Top Push Booted Top Push Top Push Cross Roller Lever One-Way Roller
Roller Booted Roller Booted Booted Lever Booted
Product Selection
7.85 N 2 mm 7 mm 0.1 mm
Top Push Booted 802B- PSABBSX
(1.76 lb) (0.079 in.) (0.276 in.) (0.004 in.)
Top Push Roller

802B- PSADBSX
Booted
4.9 N 1 mm 4.5 mm 0.12 mm
Top Push Cross (1.09 lb) (0.039 in.) (0.177 in.) (0.005 in.) Side
802B-- PSAD1BSX
Roller Booted
Roller Lever Booted 802B- PSARBSX

6.28 N 5 mm 11 mm 0.4 mm
One-Way Roller (1.40 lb) (0.197 in.) (0.433 in.) (0.016 in.) 802B-- PSAR2BSX
Lever Booted
Wiring Diagrams
1 3 2
NC 2
Com 1

NO 3
Com N.O. N.C.

5--99
Limit Switches
802B Precision
Small Metal Body

8.4 (0.33) Dia. 2 (0.08) 12.7 (0.5) Dia. x 1 (0.04)
4.8 (0.19) Width
3.8 (0.15) 3.8 (0.15)
17.0 Dia. Holes Dia. Holes
(0.67) 19 17.0 19
(0.75) (0.67) (0.75)
45.8 49.7
1/2-- (1.8) 1/2-- (1.96)
14NPT 14NPT
23.0 25.5 23.0 2.1 25.5

(0.91) (1.0) (0.91) (0.08) (1.0)
2.1
25.4 (0.08) 25.4 25.4 (1.0) 24 (0.94)
(1.0) 25.4 (1.0) 24 (0.94) (1.0) 86.0 (3.39)
86.0 (3.39)
802B-- PSABBSX 802B-- PSADBSX
19.3
(0.76)
12.7 (0.5) Dia. x 1 (0.04) 19.1 (0.75) Dia. x 39.7
4.8 (0.19) Width 7.9 (0.31) Width (1.56)
3.8 (0.15) 23.1
17.0 Dia. Holes (0.91)
19
(0.67) (0.75)
49.7
1/2-- 3.8 (0.15) 53.4
(1.96)
14NPT Dia. Holes (2.1)
17.0 19
(0.67) (0.75)
23.0 2.1 25.5
1/2--
(0.91) (0.08) (1.0)
14NPT
25.4 25.4 (1.0) 24 (0.94) 23.0 2.1 25.5

(1.0) (0.91) (0.08) (1.0)
86.0 (3.39)
25.4 (1.0) 24 (0.94)
86.0 (3.39)
802B-- PSAD1BSX 802B-- PSARBSX

18.7 (0.74) Dia. x
9 (0.35) Width
39.7
(1.56)
40.0
(1.57)
3.8 (0.15) 53.4

Dia. Holes (2.1)
17.0 19
(0.67) (0.75)
1/2--
14NPT
23.0 2.1 25.5

(0.91) (0.08) (1.0)
25.4 (1.0) 24 (0.94)

86.0 (3.39)
802B-- PSAR2BSX
5-- 100 Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs.

Limit Switches
802B Precision
Small Metal Body
Top Push Top Push Roller Top Push Roller Lever One-Way
Cross Roller Roller Lever
Product Selection
0.4 mm 5.9 mm
Top Push 802B-- PFABXSX
(0.016 in.) (0.232 in.)
2.45}3.43 N 0.05 mm
Top Push Roller 802B-- PFADXSX
(0.55}0.77 lb) 0.5 mm 4.1 mm (0.002 in.)
Top Push Cross (0.020 in.) (0.161 in.) Flange 802B-- PFAD1XSX
Roller
Roller Lever 802B-- PFARXSX

5.59 N 4 mm 10 mm 0.4 mm
One-Way Roller (1.28 lb) (0.157 in.) (0.394 in.) (0.016 in.) 802B-- PFAR2XSX
Lever
Wiring Diagrams
1 3 2
NC 2
Com 1

NO 3
Com N.O. N.C.

5--101
Limit Switches
802B Precision
Small Metal Body

26 (1.02) 0.4
8.4 (0.33) (0.02)
Dia.
17.0
(0.67)
54 1/2--
(2.13) 14NPT 63.7
41.3 (2.51)
(1.63) 3
(0.12) 23.0
(0.91)
10.6
(0.42) 36.6
(1.44) 25.4 86.0 (3.39)
(1.0)
Top View 802B-- PFABXSX
0.5 0.5
26 (1.02) (0.02) 26 (1.02) (0.02)
12.7 (0.5) x 12.7 (0.5) x
4.8 (0.19) Dia. 4.8 (0.19) Dia.
17.0 17.0
(0.67) (0.67)
1/2-- 75.2 1/2-- 75.2
14NPT (2.96) 14NPT (2.96)
3 3
(0.12) 23.0 (0.12) 23.0
(0.91) (0.91)
25.4 86.0 (3.39) 25.4 86.0 (3.39)

(1.0) (1.0)
802B-- PFADXSX 802B-- PFAD1XSX
18.7 (0.74) x
39.7 9.0 (0.35) Dia. 39.7
(1.56) (1.56)
19.1 (0.75) x
7.0 (0.28) Dia. 40
23.1 (1.57)
(0.91)
17.0 17.0
(0.67) (0.67)
1/2-- 69.5 1/2--
14NPT (2.74) 14NPT 69.5
(2.74)
3 3
(0.12) 23.0 (0.12) 23.0
(0.91) (0.91)
25.4 86.0 (3.39) 25.4 86.0 (3.39)

(1.0) (1.0)
802B-- PFARXSX 802B-- PFAR2XSX

Limit Switches
802B Precision
Small Metal Body
Top Push Booted Top Push Top Push Cross Roller Lever One-Way Roller
Roller Booted Roller Booted Booted Lever Booted
Product Selection
7.85 N 2 mm 7 mm 0.1 mm
Top Push Booted 802B-- PFABBSX
(1.76 lb) (0.079 in.) (0.276 in.) (0.004 in.)
Top Push Roller

802B-- PFADBSX
Booted
4.9 N 1 mm 4.5 mm 0.12 mm
Top Push Cross (1.09 lb) (0.039 in.) (0.177 in.) (0.005 in.) Flange
802B-- PFAD1BSX
Roller Booted
Roller Lever Booted 802B-- PFARBSX

6.28 N 5 mm 11 mm 0.4 mm
One-Way Roller (1.40 lb) (0.197 in.) (0.433 in.) (0.016 in.) 802B-- PFAR2BSX
Lever Booted
Wiring Diagrams
1 3 2
NC 2
Com 1

NO 3
Com N.O. N.C.

5--103
Limit Switches
802B Precision
Small Metal Body

26 (1.02)
2 (0.08)
8.4 (0.33) Dia.
17.0
54 (0.67)
TOW
(2.13)
71.4
R53
41.3 1/2--
14NPT (2.81)
(1.63)
3
(0.12) 23.0
10.6 (0.91)
(0.42) 36.6
(1.44)
25.4 86.0 (3.39)
(1.0)
Top View 802B-- PFABBSX
26 (1.02) 1 (0.04) 26 (1.02) 1 (0.04)

12.7 (0.5) x 12.7 (0.5) x
4.8 (0.19) Dia. 4.8 (0.19) Dia.
17.0 17.0
(0.67) (0.67)
75.2 75.2
1/2-- 1/2-- (2.96)
(2.96)
14NPT 14NPT
3 3
(0.12) 23.0 (0.12) 23.0
(0.91) (0.91)
25.4 25.4 86.0 (3.39)

86.0 (3.39) (1.0)
(1.0)
802B-- PFADBSX 802B-- PFAD1BSX
18.7 (0.74) x
39.7 9.0 (0.35) Dia. 39.7
(1.56) (1.56)
19.1 (0.75) x
7.9 (0.31) Dia. 40
23.1 (1.57)
(0.91)
17.0 17.0
(0.67) (0.67)
79 79
1/2-- 1/2--
(3.11) (3.11)
14NPT 14NPT
3 3
(0.12) 23.0 (0.12) 23.0
(0.91) (0.91)
25.4 86.0 (3.39) 25.4 86.0 (3.39)

(1.0) (1.0)
802B-- PFARBSX 802B-- PFAR2BSX

Limit Switches
802B Small Precision
Small Metal Body
Top Push Top Push Top Roller Top Push Cross Top Push Top Push Cross
Panel Mount Panel Mount Roller Panel Mount Roller Booted Roller Booted
Product Selection
3.9 mm
Top Push 802B-- SSABXSX
(0.154 in.)
Top Push Panel
802B-- SPABXSX
Mount
11.8 N
Top Push Roller (2.65 lb) 4.5 mm
802B-- SPADXSX
Panel Mount (0.177 in.)
1.5 mm 0.2 mm
Side
Top Push Cross (0.059 in.) (0.008 in.)
802B-- SPAD1XSX
Roller Panel Mount
Top Push Roller

802B- SSADBSX
Booted
6.86 N 4 mm
Top Push Cross (1.54 lb) (0.157 in.)
802B-- SSAD1BSX
Roller Booted
Wiring Diagrams
1 3 2
NC 2
Com 1

NO 3
Com N.O. N.C.

5--105
Limit Switches
Small Metal Body

53.4 (2.1)
14 (0.55) 7.8
8.0
(0.31) 53.4 (2.1) 1.5 23.3 14.0 (0.31)
1.5 7.8 (0.06) (0.92) (0.55)
(0.06) 23.3 14.0 (0.31)
3.8 (0.15)
(0.92) (0.55) 12.5 Dia. Holes
32.4 (0.49)
(1.28) 38.2
19.0 (1.50) 21.0
21.0 19.0
(0.83) (0.75) (0.83) (0.75)
22.0 22.0
5.0 5.0
(0.87) (0.87)
(0.20) 10.0 (0.20) 10.0
(0.39) (0.39)
25.4 (1.0) 21.0 25.4 (1.0) 21.0
18.3 18.3
(0.83) 15.0 (0.83)
(0.72) 55.0 (2.17) 15.0 (0.72) 55.0 (2.17)
(0.59) (0.59)
21.7 (0.85) 21.7 (0.85)
802B-- SSABXSX 802B-- SPABXSX
53.4 (2.1) 53.4 (2.1)

11.0 (0.43) x 2.25
23.3 14.0 4.7 (0.19) Dia. 1.5 11.0 (0.43) x
1.5 (0.06) 23.3 14.0 4.7 (0.19) Dia. (0.09)
(0.06) (0.92) (0.55) (0.92) (0.55)
3.6
12.5 (0.14) 12.5 3.6
2.25 (0.14)
47.4 (0.49) (0.09) 47.4 (0.49)
(1.87) (1.87)
21.0 19.0 21.0 19.0
(0.83) (0.75) (0.83) (0.75)
22.0 22.0
(0.87) 5.0 (0.87) 5.0
(0.20) 10.0 (0.20) 10.0
(0.39) (0.39)
25.4 (1.0) 21.0 25.4 (1.0)
18.3 18.3 21.0
15.0 (0.83) (0.83)
(0.72) 55.0 (2.17) (0.72) 55.0 (2.17) 15.0
(0.59) 21.7 (0.85) (0.59) 21.7 (0.85)
802B-- SPADXSX 802B-- SPAD1XSX

7.8
(0.31)
53.4 (2.1) 9.5 (0.37) x 53.4 (2.1) 9.5 (0.37) x

1.5 4.7 (0.19) Dia. 1.5 4.7 (0.19) Dia.
(0.06) 23.3 14.0 (0.06) 23.3 14.0
(0.92) (0.55) (0.92) (0.55)
47.4 47.4
(1.87) (1.87)
19.0 19.0
(0.75) (0.75)
22.0 22.0
(0.87) 5.0 (0.87) 5.0
(0.20) 10.0 (0.20) 10.0
25.4 (1.0) (0.39) 25.4 (1.0) (0.39)
18.3 21.0 18.3 21.0
(0.72) 55.0 (2.17) 15.0 (0.83) (0.72) 55.0 (2.17) 15.0 (0.83)
(0.59) (0.59)
21.7 (0.85) 21.7 (0.85)
802B-- SSADBSX 802B-- SSAD1BSX

Limit Switches
Small Metal Body
Short Hinge Hinge Lever Short Roller Roller Lever Short One-Way One-Way
Lever Lever Roller Lever Roller Lever
Product Selection
3.92 N 6.2r1.2 mm 12.2 mm 1 mm
Short Hinge Lever 802B-- SSAH1XSX
(0.88 lb) (0.244 in.) (0.480 in.) (0.04 in.)
2.75 N 8.2r1.2 mm 16.6 mm 1.4 mm

Hinge Lever 802B-- SSAHXSX
(0.62 in.) (0.323 in.) (0.645 in.) (0.055 in.)
3.92 N 6.2r1.2 mm 12.2 mm 1 mm

Short Roller Lever 802B-- SSAR1XSX
(0.88 lb) (0.244 in.) (0.480 in.) (0.04 in.)
Side
2.75 N 8.3r1.2 mm 16.7 mm 1.4 mm
Roller Lever 802B-- SSARXSX
(0.62 in.) (0.327 in.) (0.657 in.) (0.055 in.)
Short One-Way 3.92 N 6.2r1.2 mm 12.2 mm 1 mm

802B-- SSAR3XSX
Roller Lever (0.88 lb) (0.244 in.) (0.480 in.) (0.04 in.)
One-Way Roller 2.75 N 8.2r1.2 mm 16.6 mm 1.4 mm
802B-- SSAR2XSX
Lever (0.62 in.) (0.244 in.) (0.654 in.) (0.055 in.)
Wiring Diagrams
1 3 2
NC 2
Com 1

NO 3
Com N.O. N.C.

5--107
Limit Switches
Small Metal Body

53.4 (2.1) 53.4 (2.1)
34.6 14.0 8.0 34.6 14.0 8.0
(1.36) (0.55) (0.31) (1.36) (0.55) (0.31)
3.8 (0.15)
Dia. Holes
34.7 36.7
28.5 (1.37) 28.5 (1.44)
22.0 22.5 20.0 (1.12) 22.0 22.5 20.0 (1.12)
(0.87) (0.89) (0.79) (0.87) (0.89) (0.79)
5.0 5.0
(0.20) 10.0 (0.20) 10.0
25.4 (1.0) (0.39) 21.0 25.4 (1.0) (0.39) 21.0
18.3 18.3
(0.72) 15.0 (0.83) (0.72) 15.0 (0.83)
55.0 (2.17) 55.0 (2.17)
(0.59) 21.7 (0.85) (0.59) 21.7 (0.85)
802B-- SSAH1XSX 802B-- SSAHXSX
12.7 (0.5) x 12.7 (0.5) x

53.4 (2.1) 7.5 (0.3) Dia. 53.4 (2.1) 7.5 (0.3) Dia.
34.6 (1.36) 14.0 (0.55) 34.6 (1.36) 14.0
(0.55)
43.0
(1.69) 43.0
(1.69)
49.2 51.3
22.0 22.5 20.0
(1.94) 22.0 22.5 20.0
(2.02)
(0.87) (0.89) (0.79) (0.87) (0.89) (0.79)
5.0 5.0
(0.20) 10.0 (0.20) 10.0
25.4 (1.0) (0.39) 25.4 (1.0) (0.39)
21.0 21.0
18.3 18.3
15.0 (0.83) 15.0 (0.83)
(0.72) 55.0 (2.17) (0.72) 55.0 (2.17)
(0.59) 21.7 (0.85) (0.59) 21.7 (0.85)
802B-- SSAR1XSX 802B-- SSARXSX
53.4 (2.1) 12.7 (0.5) x 53.4 (2.1) 12.7 (0.5) x

14.0 (0.55) 7.5 (0.3) Dia. 14.0 (0.55) 7.5 (0.3) Dia.
34.6 (1.36) 34.6 (1.36)
53.0 53.0
(2.09) (2.09)
20.0 59.2 20.0 61.2

22.0 22.5 (2.33) 22.0 22.5 (2.41)
(0.87) (0.89) (0.79) (0.87) (0.89) (0.79)
5.0 5.0
(0.20) 10.0 (0.20) 10.0
25.4 (1.0) (0.39) 21.0 25.4 (1.0) (0.39) 21.0
18.3 18.3
(0.72) 15.0 (0.83) (0.72) 15.0 (0.83)
55.0 (2.17) 55.0 (2.17)
(0.59) 21.7 (0.85) (0.59) 21.7 (0.85)
802B-- SSAR3XSX 802B-- SSAR2XSX

Limit Switches
802T Safety Limit Switches
Direct Opening Action Position Interlock Switches
Specifications
Enclosure Rating NEMA 4, 6P, 12, 13 and IP67
Pollution Degree 3
Certifications cULus Listed, TÜV, and CE Marked for all applicable directives
Standards EN954-- 1, ISO13849-- 1, IEC/EN60204-- 1, NFPA79, EN1088, ISO14119,
IEC/EN60947-- 5-- 1, ANSI B11.19, AS4024-- 1
Category Cat. 1 Device per EN954-- 1 Dual channel interlocks suitable for Cat. 3 or
4 systems
Operating Temperature [C (F)] - 18}+110q (0}+230q)
Cable Versions Temperature - 18}60q (0}140q)
[C (F)]
Storage Temperature [C (F)] - 40}121q (-- 40}250q)
AC Contact Rating (Maximum per Pole, 50 or 60Hz, 2 Circuits)

Description NEMA A Continuous VA
Rating Max Carrying
Bulletin 802T direct opening action limit Designation Voltage Make Break Current Make Break
switches have been designed for use in
120 60 6.00 10 7200 720
control reliable applications and safety
applications per ISO 14119. These limit A600 240 30 3.00 10 7200 720
switches utilize the same mounting AC-- 15 480 15 1.50 10 7200 720
dimensions as other NEMA style limit 600 12 1.20 10 7200 720
switches. The rugged metal
construction and plug-in body are AC Contact Rating (Maximum per Pole, 50 or 60Hz, 4 Circuits)
designed for use in harsh industrial
environments. NEMA A Continuous VA
Rating Max Carrying
Direct opening action assures that the Designation Voltage Make Break Current Make Break
normally closed contacts open when 120 60 6.00 10 7200 720
the limit switch is actuated. This A300
opening will occur even in the event of AC-- 15 240 30 3.00 10 7200 720
a contact weld condition, up to 10
DC Contact Rating (Maximum per Pole)
Newtons.
Rating Max Carrying
ATTENTION To ensure that the Designation Voltage Make Break Current Make Break
normally closed 250 0.27 0.27 2.5 69 69
Q300
(safety) contacts open, DC 13 125 0.55 0.55 2.5 69 69
the limit switch
actuator must be Low Voltage DC
displaced beyond the 24 V DC @ 1.1 Amps resistive load
point of Direct Opening
Action (see Typical Applications Direct Opening Action
specifications). S Machine guards Lever Type x Spring Return page 5--110
Top Push Roller x
S Access gates and doors Spring Return . . . . . . . . . . page 5--110
Features S Cranes or hoists Side Push Verticle Roller x
S Direct opening action S Transfer stations Spring Return . . . . . . . . . . . page 5--110
S Indexing tables Side Push Horizontal Roller x
S Snap acting contacts Spring Return . . . . . . . . . . . page 5--110
S Rugged metal construction S Robotic cells Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5--111
S Long life and reliability Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5--112
S Plug-in design
S NEMA 6P/IP67 sealing
S Equal length mounting back base

5--109
Limit Switches
Range of Operation
Travel to
Operate Contacts
D
Travel to D
Travel to
Reset D D Reset
Travel to Operate Contacts
Travel to Reset Contacts

D
D
D
Lever Type Top Push Roller Side Push Side Push
Spring Return Spring Return Verticle Roller Horizontal Roller
Max Travel Spring Return Spring Return
Selection Guide
Torque/
Force to Travel to
Operate Operate
Torque/ Direct Direct Travel to
Number Force to Travel to Opening Opening Reset
of Operate Operate Action Action Max Contacts
Circuits Lever Movement vs. Contact Operation (Max) (Max) (Min) (Min) Travel (Max) Cat. No.
Lever Type x Spring Return

Switch w/o Lever
2 1 2 1 2 1 2
3 4 3 4 3 4 802T- APD
Clockwise or 0.45 NSm 0.90 NSm
13_ 25_ 90_ 7_
Counter Clockwise 1 2 1 2 1 2 (4.0 lbSin) (8.0 lbSin)
4 3 4 3 4 3 4 802T- ATPD
5 6 5 6 5 6
7 8 7 8 7 8
Top Push Roller x Spring Return
Normal Operated Complete Switch

2 1 2 1 2
3 4
802T-- DPD
3 4 28.47 1.17 mm 66.72 N 2.29 mm 5.99 mm 0.64 mm
NSm (6.4 (0.046 (15.0 (0.090 (0.236 (0.025
1 2 1 2
3 4 3 4
lbSft) in.) lbSin) in.) in.) in.)
4 802T-- DTPD
5 6 5 6
7 8 7 8
Side Push Verticle Roller x Spring Return

2 1 2 1 2
3 4
802T-- KPD
3 4
24.5 NSm 2.08 mm 53.4 N 4.19 mm 5.74 mm 1.14 mm
1 2 1 2 (5.5 lbSft) (0.082 (12.0 (0.165 (0.226 (0.045
3 4 3 4 in.) lbSft) in.) in.) in.)
4 802T-- KTPD
5 6 5 6
7 8 7 8
Side Push Horizontal Roller x Spring Return

2 1 2 1 2
3 4
802T-- K1PD
3 4 2.08 mm 53.4 N 4.19 mm 5.74 mm 1.14 mm
24.5 NSm
(0.082 (12.0 (0.165 (0.226 (0.045
1 2 1 2 (5.5 lbSft)
3 4 3 4
in.) lbSft) in.) in.) in.)
4 802T-- K1TPD
5 6 5 6
7 8 7 8

Limit Switches
Typical Example of a Dual Channel Safety Application
2-Circuit 4-Circuit
Negative Mode Positive Mode

Operation Operation
Guard Closed Guard Closed
1 5
Aux 1 Aux 2
2 6
3 7
4 8
To Safety Related Part of the Safety Safety
Machine Control System Channel 1 Channel 2

14.7
(0.58)
1.2
(0.05)
20.6
(0.81)
24 (0.95)
103.4
(4.07) 8.7
70.6 (0.34) 59.5 83.7
75.8 Dia. (3.30)
(2.78) (2.34)
(2.98)
36.5 29.4
(1.44) (1.16)
(2) #10--32
UNF--2B 42.9 41.3
(1.69) (1.63)
46.8
(1.84) Plug-In Switch
3.6 23.1
(0.14) (0.91)
43.7 19.6 3.6 50.8 (2.0)
(1.72) (0.77) 59.6 (0.14)
(2.35)
51.6
30.3 (2.03) 24.4
34.9 19.1
(1.38) (0.75) (1.19) (0.96) 20.6
12.7 (0.81)
(0.5)
15.2 12.4
(0.60) (0.49) Dia.
Lever Type Head Top Push Roller Head Side Push Roller Head

5-- 111
Limit Switches
Modifications 5-Pin Mini-Type Receptacle (2 circuit) Micro Style Quick-Disconnect

“J1” Wiring “J9” Wiring Micro quick-disconnects are available
Metric Conduit Entry
2 4 5 1 with a 5-pin 2 keyway AC or 5-pin single
To order a limit switch with a 20 mm keyway DC. To order a limit switch with
conduit entry, add the suffix S6 to the a AC micro quick-disconnect, add the
Cat. No. example: 802T--APDS6. suffix R5 to the cat. no. To order a limit
Same Same
Polarity Polarity switch with a DC micro quick-
Pre-wired Cable
disconnect, add the suffix D5 to the Cat.
To order factory installed pre-wired type No. example: 802T--APDR5 and
STOOW--A cable (5 conductor), add the 5 1 2 4 802T--APDD5.
suffix Y plus the number of feet AC Micro QD DC Micro QD
required. The standard cable length is
1.52 m (5 ft). Extended cable lengths 1 2 2 4
are available in multiples of 1.22 m (4 ft)
Same Same
only. Polarity Polarity
Example: To order a limit switch with a 3 4 3 1
factory installed 1.52 m (5 ft) cable, the 9-Pin Mini-Type Receptacle (4 circuit)
Cat. No. would become 802T--APDY5. “J1” Wiring (“J9” wiring not available for 4 circuit)
To order a limit switch with a factory
installed 2.44 m (8 ft) cable, the Cat. 3
No. would become 802T--APDY8. Same
Polarity 4
2
Mini Style Quick-Disconnect 1
To order a Bulletin 802T pre-wired limit Pin 5 = Ground
switch with a 5-pin (2 circuit) or 9-pin
(4 circuit) mini connector, add the suffix 8
J1 or J9 depending on desired wiring
(J9 wiring not available for four-circuit 6
models) to the Cat. No. example: 5
9
802T--APDJ1.
cable is available in Connection
Systems.
5--pin mini = (889N--F5AFC--6F) on page 8--4
9--pin mini = (889N--F9AF--2) on page 8--14
5--pin mini = (889R--F5AEA--2) on page 8--28
5--pin mini = (889D--F5AC--2) on page 8--16
Levers
Roller
Type Material Diameter [mm (in.)] Width [mm (in.)] Cat. No.
Nylon 19 (0.75) 7.11 (0.28) 802T-- W1
Nylon 19 (0.75) 25.4 (1.0) 802T-- W1H
Steel 19 (0.75) 6.35 (0.25) 802T-- W1A
Non-Adj. Cast Lever 1.5 in. Ball Bearing 19 (0.75) 5.84 (0.23) 802T-- W1B
Radius Roller on Front

Limit Switches
440P Safety Limit Switches
International Style Safety Limit Switches
22 mm Small Plastic 22 mm Compact Metal
30 mm Large Metal 15 mm Plastic
General Description Contact Arrangements

The 440P limit switch family offers a full The large, metal-body style is available in All 440P international-style limit switches
range of international-style solutions for the following operator types: contain positive opening-action contacts,
both safety and standard sensing Metal roller plunger making them ideal for safety-related
applications. Available in four different body applications. The small, plastic models
Metal dome plunger
styles—30 mm metal, 22 mm metal and include a choice of snap-acting, slow-
plastic and 15 mm plastic—with a broad Short lever with metal or plastic roller break/make with 2- or 3-contacts
selection of operator types, circuit Adjustable lever with plastic or large configurations, while the large metal
arrangements and connection options, the rubber roller switches contain snap-acting, slow-break
Bul. 440P is ideal for a wide variety of Metal rod lever contacts in 2-, 3-, or 4-contact
applications. These include material Metal spring rod configurations. The 15 mm plastic versions
handling, packaging, elevators, escalators, Telescopic arm are slow-break, 2-circuit models. The small
scissor lifts, industrial trucks and tractors, metal models are all snap-acting.
cranes and hoists, overhead door, as well The compact metal body style is available
as general safety guarding applications. in the following operator types:
Mechanical Enclosure Roller plunger
The large metal-body (440P-M) models Dome plunger
feature die-cast alloy construction and Short lever with plastic or 1 in. wide
conform to EN 50041 (30 mm x 60 mm), plastic roller
while the small plastic (440P–C) models are Cross roller plunger
constructed of a glass-filled polymer and Adjustable lever with plastic or metal
conform to EN 50047 (22 mm). Both body roller
types are IP66 rated and available with M20
or 1/2 in. NPT conduit opening or in micro All, except the lever versions, are available
quick-disconnect versions. The 15 mm with panel mount threading.
plastic models (440P–M18001 and The small, plastic-body style is available in
440P–M18002) are constructed of glass- the following operator types:
filled polyester and are IP30 rated. The 22 Adjustable lever with plastic or large
mm metal models (440P-A) have a painted rubber roller
body and are IP65, IP66, IP67, and IP69K Short lever with plastic or metal roller
(pre-leaded cable versions). Pre-leaded
Hinge lever
cable and micro quick disconnect
configurations are offered. Roller plunger
Dome plunger
Actuator Type Offset hinge lever
The Bul. 440P international-style limit
switches are available with a wide variety of The 15 mm plastic-body switch is available
actuators to solve a broad range of with a roller plunger actuator.
applications. All lever-type switches include
their respective actuator arm. Bul. 440P
actuators are offered as replaceable
products.
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs New 5-113

Limit Switches
22 mm Compact Metal Position Switches
Specifications
Safety Ratings
EN 954-1, ISO 13849-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, NFPA 79, EN 1088,
Standards
ISO 14119, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS 4024.1
Cat.1 Device per EN 954-1 Dual channel limit switch suitable for Cat. 3
Safety Classification
or 4 systems when ganged together
Certifications UL Listed, TÜV and CE Marked for all applicable directives
Outputs
Safety Contacts 1 N.C. snap-acting, 2 N.C. slow-acting
Auxiliary Contacts 1 N.O. snap-acting
Thermal CurrentIlth 10 A
Rated Insulation Voltage 300V AC
Contact Rating
Description
Maximum AC Contact Rating Per Pole‡
The 22 mm IEC-style metal safety limit
Amperes Continuous Volt Amperes
switches have been developed to provide a NEMA Rating Max.
Carrying
small metal case with a choice of actuator Designation Voltage Make Break Current [A] Make Break
heads.
120 30 3.0
Features AC15/B300 5 3600 360
240 15 1.5
Rugged die-cast enclosure Maximum DC Contact Rating Per Pole‡
Positive operation, forced disconnection DC13/Q300 240 0.27 0.27 2.5 69 69
of contacts (direct-opening action)
Operating Characteristics
Snap-acting contact actuation
Actuation Speed, Max. 250 mm/s
Contacts 1 N.C. + 1 N.O. or 2 N.C.
Actuation Speed, Min. 100 mm/min.
Pre-wired 2 m (6.5 ft) cable with bottom or
side out exit; 4-pin or 5-pin male micro Actuation Frequency, Max. 6000 ops/hr
M12 connector attached to a 152 mm Mechanical Life 1 x 107 operations with no electrical load
(6 in.) pigtail Environmental
Enclosure Type Rating Type 1, IP65, IP66, IP67, and IP69K (preleaded versions)
ATTENTION For safety applications it is Operating Temperature [C (F)] 2…+70° (35.6…+158°)
important that upon actuation, Pollution Degree 3
the guard or other moving
objects should not pass Physical Characteristics
completely over the switch and Housing Material Die-cast alloy
allow the plunger or lever to
return to its original position. Actuator Material Various polymers and metals
Mounting 2 x M4, any position
Vibration IEC 68-2-6 (10…55 Hz, 0.35 mm amplitude)
Shock IEC 68-2-7 (30 Gn 3 pulses per axis)
Connection 2 m (6.5 ft) cable or micro quick disconnect on a 6 in. pigtail
Color Red body/black head
The safety contacts are described as normally closed (N.C.) i.e., with the guard closed, actuator in
place (where relevant) and the machine able to be started.
‡ Maximum for:
4-pin Male Micro M12 Connectors (D4 suffix)
AC DC
30V, 3 A 30V, 3 A
5-pin Male Micro M12 Connectors (D5 suffix)
AC DC
60V, 3 A 60V, 3 A
New Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs

5-114 Preferred availability cat. nos. are printed in bold.
Limit Switches
22 mm Metal Position Switches
Product Selection
Contact Opening
Contact Max Characteristics Cat. No.
Force/ 2 m (6.5 ft)
Torque to Bottom Cable 2 m (6.5 ft) Side 4-pin Micro QD 5-pin Micro QD
Operator Type Safety Aux. Type Operate Style Cable Style Style Style
5.2 mm
0 mm 2 mm 5.5 mm
Snap
1 N.C. 1 N.O. 440P-ARPS11C 440P-ARPS11CS 440P-ARPS11D4 440P-ARPS11D5
Acting
0.6 mm
0 mm 1.4 mm 2.6 mm 5.5 mm
Roller Plunger 2 N.C. — — 11…12 440P-ARPB02C 440P-ARPB02CS 440P-ARPB02D4 440P-ARPB02D5

21…22
Snap
1 N.C. 1 N.O. 440P-ARP1S11C 440P-ARP1S11CS — 440P-ARP1S11D5
Acting 0 mm 2 mm
5.2 mm
5.5 mm
Roller Plunger
Panel Mount
0.6 mm
Snap
1 N.C. 1 N.O. 440P-ADPS11C 440P-ADPS11CS 440P-ADPS11D4 440P-ADPS11D5
Acting
0 mm 1.4 mm 2.6 mm 5.5 mm
Dome Plunger 2 N.C. — — 11…12 440P-ADPB02C 440P-ADPB02CS 440P-ADPB02D4 440P-ADPB02D5

10 N 21…22
(2.25 lb)
Snap
1 N.C. 1 N.O. 440P-ADP1S11C 440P-ADP1S11CS — 440P-ADP1S11D5
Acting
Dome Plunger
Panel Mount
5.2 mm
0 mm 2 mm 5.5 mm
Snap
1 N.C. 1 N.O. 440P-ACRS11C 440P-ACRS11CS 440P-ACRS11D4 440P-ACRS11D5
Acting
Cross Roller 0.6 mm
Plunger
Snap
1 N.C. 1 N.O. 440P-ACR1S11C 440P-ACR1S11CS — 440P-ACR1S11D5
Acting
Cross Roller
Plunger Panel
Mount
Snap
1 N.C. 1 N.O. 440P-AWLS11C 440P-AWLS11CS 440P-AWLS11D4 440P-AWLS11D5
Acting 85° 75° 35° 0° 35° 75° 85°
Short Lever
Wide Roller
15° 15°
Snap
1 N.C. 1 N.O. 440P-ASLS11C 440P-ASLS11CS 440P-ASLS11D4 440P-ASLS11D5
Acting
85° 41° 26° 0° 26° 41° 85°

Short Lever
2 N.C. — — 11…12 440P-ASLB02C 440P-ASLB02CS 440P-ASLB02D4 440P-ASLB02D5
Nylon Roller 21…22
0.2 N•m
(1.77 lb•in)
Snap
1 N.C. 1 N.O. 440P-AALS11C 440P-AALS11CS 440P-AALS11D4 440P-AALS11D5
Acting 85° 75° 35° 0° 35° 75° 85°
Adj. Lever
Nylon Roller
15° 15°
Snap
1 N.C. 1 N.O. 440P-AA1LS11C 440P-AA1LS11CS 440P-AA1LS11D4 440P-AA1LS11D5
Acting
85° 41° 26° 0° 26° 41° 85°

Adj. Lever
2 N.C. — — 11…12 440P-AA1LB02C 440P-AA1LB02CS 440P-AA1LB02D4 440P-AA1LB02D5
Metal Roller 21…22
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs

Preferred availability cat. nos. are printed in bold. New 5-115
Limit Switches
22 mm Compact Metal Position Switches
Approximate Dimensions⎯mm (inches)

Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes. Note: Only non-panel mount pre-leaded
Non-Panel Mount side out models shown. Body
13 (0.51) 30.4 (1.2) dimensions for panel mount models
30.4 (1.2) Dia.
10.5 3.8 (0.15) 12 as well as pre-leaded bottom out and
20 7.2 (0.28) (0.41) (0.47) 4-pin/5-pin micro connector mounted
(0.79) Dia. Dia. Dia.
24 7.2 (0.28) on a 6 in. pigtail models are identical.
20 (0.94) Dia.
(0.79)
4.2 (0.17) For other dimension drawings, refer
43 Dia. 20 4.2 (0.17)
(1.69) 25 37.5 (0.79) Dia. to Installation and Operating
(0.98) (1.48) 43 25 (0.98) 37.5 Instructions.
(1.69) (1.48)
16
Side cable style shows strain relief only.
35
(1.38) (0.63) 35 16 Units include a 2 m integral cable.
(1.38) (0.63) Bottom cable style units have same
Dome Plunger Cross Roller Plunger dimensions as side cable style.
30.4 (1.2)
30.4 (1.2)
5.2 (0.2) Panel mount clearance hole = 13 mm
3.8 35.8
12 (0.47) (1.41) (0.51 in.)
Dia. (0.15)
24 7.2 (0.28) 13.5 (0.53)
(0.94) Dia. 25
(0.98) Dia.
20 4.2 (0.17)
Counter Sinkhole
18 7.2 (0.28)
(0.79) Dia. Dia. 25 (0.98)
43 37.5 (0.71)
(1.69) 25 (0.98) (1.48) 20
20 4.2 (0.17) (0.79)
(0.79) Dia. Two 4.2 (0.165) dia. holes
43 37.5 Countersink: 7.2 (0.28) dia.
35 16 (1.69) 25 (0.98) (1.48) Depth: 4.2 (0.165)
(1.38) (0.63)
35 16
(1.38) (0.63)
Roller Plunger Lever Type
30.4 25.4 35.15 16.5X7.0 43.4
Ø13.5
38.2
Ø13.5
25.0 25.0 R27 (MIN)
R105 (MAX)
18 Ø7.2
Ø4.2 18.0
2, 4.2 Dia. Holes
Countersink: 7.2 dia.
Typical Wiring Diagrams
20.0 Depth: 4.2
25.0 37.5 Same Polarity
43.0
20.0
37.5 BLU BRN
43.0 25.0
BLK BLK/WHT GRN/YEL
Za
35.0 16.0
35.0 16.0 1 N.C.
Wide Roller Plunger Adjustable Lever Type
Grnd
22 (BLU) 21 (BRN) (GRN/YEL)
Ø5.6±0.1 Ø5.6±0.1
Positioning 12 (BLK) 11 (BLK/WHT)
Positioning Pin 2 Piece
Pin 2
Aux. Input Piece Aux. Input Pin 1 Zb
Pin 1 Blue N.O. Aux. Output
Blue N.O. Safety Input Brn N.O.
45.0±2.0
Pin 3 Blk N.C.
45.0±2.0
Pin 3 Pin 4 2 N.C.
Safety Output Pin 4 Common Ground Safety Input
16.0±1.0 Blk/Wht N.C. 16.0±1.0 Grn/Yel Blk N.C.
Aux Output
Brn N.O. Pin 5
M12X1 M12X1 Safety Output
WIRING A Blk/Wht N.C.
Ø14.5 Ø14.5
WIRING A
4-pin Micro Quick Disconnect 5-pin Micro Quick Disconnect

Limit Switches
22mm Plastic Position Switches
Specifications
IEC/ EN60947-- 5-- 1, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1
Category Cat. 1 Device per EN954-- 1 Dual channel interlocks suitable for Cat. 3 or 4
systems
Approvals cULus, TÜV, CCC and CE Marked for all applicable directives
Safety Contacts 1 N.C. snap acting, 2 N.C., 3 N.C. or 4 N.C. slow acting
Auxiliary Contacts 1 N.O. (with 2 N.C.)
Designation/Utilization Cat. Contact Specifications
A600/AC- 15 (Ue) 600 V 500 V 240 V 120 V
Description (Ie) 1.2 A 1.4 A 3A 6A
Q600/DC- 13 (Ue) 600 V 500 V 250 V 125 V
The 22 mm plastic safety limit switches (Ie) 0.4 A 0.55 A 1.1 A 2.2 A
conform to EN 50047 and have been
developed to provide a range of options Thermal Current (lth) 10 A
including a choice of snap acting, slow Rated Insulation Voltage 600 V AC
break/make with 2- or 3-circuit
Rated Impulse withstand Volt 2500 V
configurations and a choice of actuator
heads. The distance between the mounting Travel for Positive Opening Various (see Product Selection table)
holes is 22 mm. Max Switching Speed 250 mm/s
The operator heads can be rotated in 90° Min Switching Speed 100 mm/min
increments for easy mounting.
Max Switching Frequency 6000 operation per hour
Allen-Bradley Guardmaster limit switches
can be used in other applications other Case Material UL approved glass-filled polybutylene terephthalate
than guard doors, for example on moving Roller Material Various polymers
machine beds, crane arms, lifts, elevators,
Enclosure Protection IP 66
etc.
Operating Temperature [C (F)] -25…+65° (-13…+149°)
Operation of these limit switches is
achieved by the sliding action of the guard Pollution Degree 3
or other moving object deflecting the Mechanical. Life Expectancy 1 x 107 operations with no electrical load
plunger or lever.
Conduit Entry M20 or 1/2 inch NPT
Fixing 2 x M4
Mounting Any position
Color Red
Maximum for:
ATTENTION For safety applications Two-Circuit D4 4-Pin Micro Connector
it is important that AC DC
250V, 2.5 A 250V, 2.5 A
upon actuation, the
Three-Circuit R6 6-Pin Micro Connector
guard or other moving
AC DC
objects should not
30V, 2 A 30V, 2 A
pass completely over
the switch and allow
the plunger or lever to Features Safety Limit Switches
return to its original S Large selection of actuator heads Product Selection . . . . . . . . page 5--117
position. S Positive operation, forced Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5--119
disconnection of contacts Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5--120
S Snap-acting, slow make before break
or slow break before make contact
blocks
S Contacts 1 N.C. + 1 N.O., 2 N.C. +
1 N.O. 3 N.C., 2 N.C. + 1 N.O.
S Conforms to EN 50047, EN 1088, EN
60947--5--1, EN 292 and EN
60204--1
5-- 116 New Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs.

Limit Switches
Product Selection
Contact Opening
Contact Typical Characteristics Cat. No.
Force/
Contact Torque to Open Closed 1/2 inch NPT
Operator Type Safety Aux. Type Operate Positive Opening Point Conduit M20 Conduit Quick Disconnect
2.7 4.0
0mm 8N 6.2
Snap 11-- 12
1 N.C. 1 N.O. 5N 23-- 24

440P-- CRPS11E 440P- CRPS11B 440P-- CRPS11D4
Acting 11-- 12
23-- 24
2.4
2.1
0mm 3.3 6.2
5N
11-- 12
2 N.C. 1 N.O. BBM 6N 21-- 22 440P-- CRPB12E 440P-- CRPB12B 440P-- CRPB12R6
33-- 34
3.0
1.9
0mm 3.3 6.2
5N
3 N.C. — — 5N 11-- 12
21-- 22
440P-- CRPB03E 440P-- CRPB03B 440P-- CRPB03R6
31-- 32
Roller Plunger
2.1
0mm 3.3 6.2
5N
11-- 12
2 N.C. 1 N.O. MBB 6N 21-- 22 440P-- CRPM12E 440P-- CRPM12B 440P-- CRPM12R6
33-- 34
1.3
2.7 4.0
0mm 7N 6.4
Snap 11-- 12
1 N.C. 1 N.O. 5N 23-- 24

440P-- CDPS11E 440P-- CDPS11B 440P-- CDPS11D4
Acting 11-- 12
23-- 24
2.1
0mm 2.0
3.3 6.4
0N 5N
11-- 12
2 N.C. 1 N.O. BBM 6N 21-- 22 440P-- CDPB12E 440P-- CDPB12B 440P-- CDPB12R6
33-- 34
3.0
7N
0mm 2.1
3.3 6.4
0N 5N
3 N.C. — — 5N 11-- 12
21-- 22
440P-- CDPB03E 440P-- CDPB03B 440P-- CDPB03R6
31-- 32
Dome Plunger
0mm 3.3 6.4
0N 1.9
11-- 12
2 N.C. 1 N.O. MBB 6N 21-- 22

33-- 34
440P-- CDPM12E 440P-- CDPM12B 440P-- CDPM12R6
1.3
5N
3.5 6.5
0mm 6N 10.0
Snap 11-- 12
1 N.C. 1 N.O. 5N 23-- 24

440P-- CHLS11E 440P- CHLS11B 440P-- CHLS11D4
Acting 11-- 12
23-- 24
2.6
3.1
0mm 5. 3 10.0
2N
11-- 1 2
2 N.C. 1 N.O. BBM 6N 21-- 2 2 440P-- CHLB12E 440P-- CHLB12B 440P-- CHLB12R6
33-- 3 4
4.6
2.9
0m m 5.3 10.0
2N
3 N.C. — — 5N 11-- 12
21-- 22
440P-- CHLB03E 440P-- CHLB03B 440P-- CHLB03R6
31-- 32
Hinge Lever
0m m 5. 3 10.0
3.0
11 - 1 2
2 N.C. 1 N.O. MBB 6N 21 - 22

33 - 3 4
440P-- CHLM12E 440P-- CHLM12B 440P-- CHLM12R6
2. 5
2N
Recommended standard cordset, 2 m, 4-pin, DC micro (M12) connector (see page 8-- 1 for additional lengths). 889D-- F4AC-- 2
Recommended standard cordset, 2 m, 6-pin AC micro connector (see page 8-- 1 for additional lengths). 889R-- F6ECA-- 2
D4 suffix uses a 4--pin DC micro (M12) connector.
R6 suffix uses a 6--pin AC micro (dual keyway) connector.

5--117
Limit Switches
Product Selection (continued)

Contact Opening
Contact Typical Characteristics Cat. No.
Force/
31_ 31_
50_ 50_
88_ 15 cNm 0_ 15cNm 88_
11 - 1 2
Snap
1 N.C. 1 N.O. 0.15 NSm 23 - 2 4
440P-- CSLS11E 440P- CSLS11B 440P-- CSLS11D4
Acting 11 - 1 2
23 - 2 4
16_ 16_
27_ 27_
47_ 47_
88_ 10cN m 0_ 10cN m 88_
11-- 1 2
2 N.C. 1 N.O. BBM 0.14 NSm 21-- 22 440P-- CSLB12E 440P-- CSLB12B 440P-- CSLB12R6
33-- 34
37_ 37_
27_ 27_
47_ 0_ 47_
88_ 10cNm 10cNm 88_
3 N.C. — — 0.14 NSm 11-- 12

21-- 22
440P-- CSLB03E 440P-- CSLB03B 440P-- CSLB03R6
31-- 32
Short Lever
26_ 26_
47_ 47_
88_ 0_ 88_
11-- 12
2 N.C. 1 N.O. MBB 0.14 NSm 21-- 22 440P-- CSLM12E 440P-- CSLM12B 440P-- CSLM12R6
33-- 34
37_ 37_
10cNm 10cNm
31_ 31_
50_ 50_
88_ 15 cNm 0_ 15cNm 88_
11 - 1 2
Snap
1 N.C. 1 N.O. 0.15 NSm 23 - 2 4
440P-- CMHS11E 440P-- CMHS11B 440P-- CMHS11D4
Acting 11 - 1 2
23 - 2 4
16_ 16_
27_ 27_
47_ 47_
88_ 10cN m 0_ 10cN m 88_
11-- 1 2
2 N.C. 1 N.O. BBM 0.14 NSm 21-- 22 440P-- CMHB12E 440P-- CMHB12B 440P-- CMHB12R6
33-- 34
37_ 37_
27_ 27_
47_ 0_ 47_
88_ 10cNm 10cNm 88_
3 N.C. — — 0.14 NSm 11-- 12

21-- 22
440P-- CMHB03E 440P-- CMHB03B 440P-- CMHB03R6
Short Lever 31-- 32
Metal Roller 47_

26_ 26_
47_
88_ 0_ 88_
11-- 12
2 N.C. 1 N.O. MBB 0.14 NSm 21-- 22 440P-- CMHM12E 440P-- CMHM12B 440P-- CMHM12R6
33-- 34
37_ 37_
10cNm 10cNm
4.2 6.5
0mm 5N 9.0
Snap 11-- 12
1 N.C. 1 N.O. 5N 23-- 24

440P-- COHS11E 440P-- COHS11B 440P-- COHS11D4
Acting 11-- 12
23-- 24
3.0
3.9
0mm 5.3 9.0
2N
11-- 12
2 N.C. 1 N.O. BBM 6N 21-- 22 440P-- COHB12E 440P-- COHB12B 440P-- COHB12R6
33-- 34
5.6
3.8
0m m 5.3 9.0
2N
3 N.C. — — 5N 11-- 12
21-- 22
440P-- COHB03E 440P-- COHB03B 440P-- COHB03R6
31-- 32
Offset Hinge
3.8
0m m 5.3 9.0
2N
2 N.C. 1 N.O. MBB 6N 11-- 12

21-- 22
440P-- COHM12E 440P-- COHM12B 440P-- COHM12R6
31-- 32
Recommended standard cordset, 2 m, 4-pin, DC micro (M12) connector (see page 8-- 1 for additional lengths) 889D-- F4AC-- 2
Recommended standard cordset, 2 m, 6-pin AC micro connector (see page 8-- 1 for additional lengths) 889R-- F6ECA-- 2
D4 suffix uses a 4--pin DC micro (M12) connector.
R6 suffix uses a 6--pin AC micro (dual keyway) connector.

Limit Switches
22 mm Plastic Position Switches

Contact Opening
Contact Characteristics Cat. No.
Typical
Force/Torque 1/2 inch NPT Connector
Description Safety Auxiliary Type to Operate Conduit M20 Conduit Style
31˚ 31˚
50˚ 50˚
88˚ 15cNm 0˚ 15cNm 88˚
11-12
23-24
1 N.C. 1 N.O. Snap acting 0.15 N•m 11-12
440P-CALS11E 440P-CALS11B 440P-CALS11D4
23-24
16˚ 16˚
27˚ 27˚
47˚ 10cNm 0˚ 47˚
88˚ 10cNm 88˚
11- 12
2 N.C. 1 N.O. BBM 0.14 N•m 21- 22 440P-CALB12E 440P-CALB12B 440P-CALB12R6
33- 34
37˚ 37˚
27˚ 27˚
47˚ 0˚ 47˚
88˚ 10cNm 10cNm 88˚
3 N.C. — — 0.14 N•m 11- 12 440P-CALB03E 440P-CALB03B 440P-CALB03R6

21- 22
31- 32
88˚ 47˚ 26˚ 0˚ 26˚ 47˚ 88˚

11- 12
Adjustable 21- 22
2 N.C. 1 N.O. MBB 0.14 N•m 440P-CALM12E 440P-CALM12B 440P-CALM12R6
Lever ‡ 33- 34
17˚ 17 ˚
10cNm 10cNm
31 31
50 ˚ 0˚ 15cNm 50 ˚ 88 ˚
88 ˚ 15 cNm
11 -1 2
23 -2 4
1 N.C. 1 N.O Snap acting 0.15 N•m 11 -1 2 440P-CRRS11E 440P-CRRS11B 440P-CRRS11D4
23 -2 4
16 ˚ 16 ˚
27 27
47 ˚ 10 cNm 0˚ 47 ˚
88 ˚ 10 cNm 88 ˚
11- 12
2 N.C. 1 N.O. BBM 0.14 N•m 21- 22 440P-CRRB12E 440P-CRRB12B 440P-CRRB12R6

33- 34
37˚ 37˚
27 0˚ 27
88 47 ˚ 47 ˚ 88 ˚
10c Nm 10 cN m
11 -12
3 N.C. — — 0.14 N•m 21 -22 440P-CRRB03E 440P-CRRB03B 440P-CRRB03R6
31 -32
47 26 0 26 47
88 ˚ 88 ˚
11- 12
Rubber Roller 21- 22
2 N.C. 1 N.O. MBB 0.14 N•m 33- 34 440P-CRRM12E 440P-CRRM12B 440P-CRRM12R6
‡ 17 ˚ 17 ˚
10 cNm 10c Nm
Recommended standard cordset, 2 m, 4-pin, DC Micro (M12) connector. 889D-F4AC-2

Recommended standard cordset, 2 m, 6-pin, AC Micro (M12) connector. 889R-F6ACA-2
D4 suffix uses a 4-pin DC Micro (M12) connector and R6 suffix uses a 6-pin AC Micro (dual keyway) consumer.
‡ Not positive opening
Typical Wiring Diagrams §

Two-Circuit Type D4 4-Pin Micro Connector
1 N.C. + 1 N.O.
Connector Pinout Terminal Contact
2 1 11
11 12 N.C.
3 12
Same 2 23
1 3
Polarity
23 24
N.O.
4 4 24
1 N.O. + 1 N.C.
§ See Product Selection tables for positive opening circuits.
Connector Ratings
Max. Ratings Applicable
AC DC Standards
4-Pin Micro (M12) 250V, 2.5 A 250V, 2.5 A IEC 61076-2-
6-Pin Micro (M12) 30V, 2 A 30V, 2 A 101:2003
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs New

Preferred availability cat. nos. are printed in bold. 5-119
Limit Switches
Typical Wiring Diagrams (continued)

Three-Circuit Type R6 6-Pin Micro Connector
2 N.C. + 1 N.O. 3 N.C.

Same Polarity Connector Pinout Terminal Contact Terminal Contact
1 11 11
N.C. N.C.
32 31 34 33 5 12 12
2 21 21
22 21 22 21 N.C. N.C.
6 22 22
3 33 31
12 11 12 11 N.O. N.C.
4 34 32
See Product Selection tables for positive opening points.

Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes.
11.5 12
(0.45) (0.47)
9.3 (0.36) Dia.
28 17
(1.10) (0.66)
4.0
90 (0.15) 79
4.0 20 (3.11)
(0.15) (3.54) (0.78)
Max Max
20
(0.78) 22 (0.86)
22 (0.86)
31 (1.22) 31 (1.22)
31 (1.22) 31 (1.22)
Roller Plunger Dome Plunger
41 (1.61)
17.5 (0.68) Dia.
5
15 (0.59) Dia.
(0.19)
50
38 (1.96)
(1.49)
112
100 (4.4)
4.0 (3.93) 4.0
(0.15) Max (0.15)
20 20
(0.78) (0.78)
22 (0.86)
22 (0.86)
31 (1.22) 31 (1.22)
31 (1.22) 31 (1.22)
Hinge Lever Short Lever

(Metal & Plastic Roller)

Limit Switches

12 40 (1.57)
(0.47)
12 (0.47) Dia. 17.5 (0.68) Dia.
42
(1.65)
45--90
(1.77--3.54)
103 106
4.0 (4.05) (4.17)
17 (0.15) Min
(0.66)
20 4.0
(0.78) (0.15)
22
(0.86) 20
(0.78)
22
(0.86)
31 (1.22) 31 (1.22)
Offset Hinge 31 (1.22) 31 (1.22)
Adjustable Lever
40.7 (1.60)
50
(1.96)
Dia.
45--77
(1.77--3.03)
133
(5.23)
Min
4.0
(0.15)
20
(0.78)
22
(0.86)
31 (1.22) 31 (1.22)
Rubber Roller

5--121
Limit Switches
30mm Metal Position Switches
Specifications
IEC/ EN60947-- 5-- 1, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1
Category Cat. 1 Device per EN954-- 1 Dual channel interlocks suitable for Cat. 3 or 4
systems
Approvals cULus, TÜV, CE and CCC Marked for all applicable directives
Safety Contacts 1 N.C. snap acting, 2 N.C., 3 N.C. or 4 N.C. slow acting
Auxiliary Contacts 1 N.O. (with 2 N.C.)
Designation/Utilization Cat. Contact Specifications
A600/AC- 15 (Ue) 600 V 500 V 240 V 120 V
(Ie) 1.2 A 1.4 A 3A 6A
Q600/DC- 13 (Ue) 600 V 500 V 250 V 125 V
(Ie) 0.1 A 0.13 A 0.27 A 09.55 A
Thermal Current (lth) 8A
The 30 mm metal safety limit switches
conform to EN 50041 and have been Rated Insulation Voltage 600 V AC
developed to provide a range of options Rated Impulse withstand Volt 2500 V
including a choice of snap-acting,
slow-acting, and break before make (BBM) Travel for Positive Opening Various (see Product Selection table)
with 2-, 3-, and 4-circuit configurations and Max Switching Speed 250 mm/s
a choice of actuator heads. The distance
Min Switching Speed 100 mm/min
between the horizontal mounting holes is
30 mm. Max Switching Frequency 6000 operation per hour
The operator heads can be rotated in 90° Case Material Die cast alloy
increments for easy mounting. Actuator Material See Product Selection table
Allen-Bradley/Guardmaster limit switches Enclosure Protection IP66
can be used in other applications other
than guard doors, for example on moving Operating Temperature [C (F)] -25…+65° (-13…+149°)
machine beds, crane arms, lifts, elevators, Pollution Degree 3
etc.
Mechanical Life Expectancy 1 x 107 operations with no electrical load
Operation of these limit switches is Conduit Entry M20 or 1/2 inch NPT
achieved by the sliding action of the guard
or other moving object deflecting the Fixing 2 x M5
plunger or lever. Mounting Any position
Color Red
Maximum for:
Two-Circuit N5 5-Pin Mini Connector
AC DC
300V, 2.5 A 300V, 2.5 A
ATTENTION For safety applications Four-Circuit M9 12-Pin M23 Connector
it is important that AC DC
upon actuation, the 60V, 2.5 A 60V, 2.5 A
guard or other moving
Conductive pollution occurs, or dry, nonconductive pollution occurs which becomes conductive due to condensation.
objects should not
pass completely over Features Safety Limit Switches
the switch and allow S Large selection of actuator heads Product Selection . . . . . . . . page 5--123
the plunger or lever to
return to its original S Positive operation, forced Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5--126
disconnection of contacts Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5--126
position.
S Snap-acting, slow make before break
or slow break before make contact
blocks
S Contacts 1 N.C. + 1 N.O., 2 N.C. +
1 N.O. 3 N.C., 2 N.C. + 2 N.O.,
3 N.C. + 1 N.O., or 4 N.C.
S Conforms to EN 50041, EN 1088, EN
60947--5--1, EN 292 and EN
60204--1

Limit Switches
Product Selection
Contact Opening
Contacts Typical Characteristics Cat. No.
Force/
2.3
4.5
0mm 10N 7.5
Snap 11-- 12
1 N.C. 1 N.O. 13 N 23-- 24

440P-- MRPS11E 440P- MRPS11B 440P-- MRPS11N5
Acting 11-- 12
23-- 24
1.3
1.4 4.0
0mm 10N 7.5
11-- 12
4 N.C. — — 11 N 21-- 22 440P-- MRPB04E 440P-- MRPB04B 440P-- MRPB04M9
31-- 32
41-- 42
1.4 4.0
0mm 10N 7.5
11-- 12
3 N.C. 1 N.O. BBM 11 N 21-- 22

31-- 32
440P-- MRPB13E 440P-- MRPB13B 440P-- MRPB13M9
43-- 44
1.9
1.5
4.0
0mm 10N 7.5
Metal Roller 11-- 12
Plunger 2 N.C. 2 N.O. BBM 11 N 21-- 22

33-- 34
440P- MRPB22E 440P-- MRPB22B 440P-- MRPB22M9
43-- 44
1.9
2.7 4.5
0mm 10N 7.5
Snap 11-- 12
1 N.C. 1 N.O. 13 N 23-- 24

440P-- MDPS11E 440P-- MDPS11B 440P-- MDPS11N5
Acting 11-- 12
23-- 24
1.6
1.7 4.0
0mm 10N 7.5
11-- 12
4 N.C. — — 11 N 21-- 22 440P-- MDPB04E 440P-- MDPB04B 440P-- MDPB04M9
31-- 32
41-- 42
1.6
4.0
0mm 10N 7.5
11-- 12
3 N.C. 1 N.O. BBM 11 N 21-- 22

31-- 32
440P-- MDPB13E 440P-- MDPB13B 440P-- MDPB13M9
43-- 44
2.0
1.5 4.0
0mm 10N 7.5
Metal Dome 11-- 12
Plunger 2 N.C. 2 N.O. BBM 11 N 21-- 22

33-- 34
440P-- MDPB22E 440P-- MDPB22B 440P-- MDPB22M9
43-- 44
2.0
35_ 35_
83_ 54_35 cNm 54_
0_ 35cNm 83_
Snap 11 - 1 2
1 N.C. 1 N.O. 0.34 NSm 23 - 2 4

440P- MSLS11E 440P- MSLS11B 440P-- MSLS11N5
Acting 11 - 1 2
23 - 2 4
15_ 15_
21_ 21_
44_ 0_ 44_
83_ 35cNm 10cNm 83_
11-- 12
4 N.C. — — 0.20 NSm 21-- 22 440P-- MSLB04E 440P-- MSLB04B 440P-- MSLB04M9
31-- 32
41-- 42
20_ 20_
44_ 44_
83_ 35cN m 0_ 35cN m 83_
11-- 12
3 N.C. 1 N.O. BBM 0.34 NSm 21-- 22

31-- 32
440P-- MSLB13E 440P-- MSLB13B 440P-- MSLB13M9
43-- 44
26_ 26_
20_ 20_
Metal Short 11-- 12
83_
44_
35cN m 0_ 35cN m
44_
83_
Lever 2 N.C. 2 N.O. BBM 0.34 NSm 21-- 22

440P-- MSLB22E 440P-- MSLB22B 440P-- MSLB22M9
33-- 34
43-- 44
26_ 26_
Recommended standard cordset, 2 m, 5-pin mini connector (see page 8-- 1 for additional lengths). 889N-- F5AE-- 6F
Recommended standard cordset, 2 m, 12-pin 9 wire (see page 8-- 1 for additional lengths). 889M-- F12X9AE-- 2
N5 = 5--pin mini connector.
M9 = 12--pin M23 connector (use 9 wire).

5--123
Limit Switches

Contact Opening
Contacts Typical Characteristics Cat. No.
Force/
35_ 35_
54_ 54_
83_ 35 cNm 0_ 35cNm 83_
Snap 11 - 1 2
1 N.C. 1 N.O. 0.34 NSm 23 - 2 4

440P-- MMHS11E 440P-- MMHS11B 440P-- MMHS11N5
Acting 11 - 1 2
23 - 2 4
15_ 15_
21_ 21_
44_ 0_ 44_
83_ 35cNm 10cNm 83_
11-- 12
4 N.C. — — 0.20 NSm 21-- 22 440P-- MMHB04E 440P-- MMHB04B 440P-- MMHB04M9
31-- 32
41-- 42
20_ 20_
44_ 44_
83_ 35cN m 0_ 35cN m 83_
11-- 12
3 N.C. 1 N.O. BBM 0.34 NSm 21-- 22

31-- 32
440P-- MMHB13E 440P-- MMHB13B 440P-- MMHB13M9
43-- 44
26_ 26_
Metal Short 83_

44_
20_ 20_
35cN m 0_ 35cN m
44_
83_
Lever, Metal 11-- 12
Roller 2 N.C. 2 N.O. BBM 0.34 NSm 21-- 22

33-- 34
440P-- MMHB22E 440P-- MMHB22B 440P-- MMHB22M9
43-- 44
26_ 26_
35_ 35_
54_ 54_
83_ 35cNm 0_ 35cNm 83_
Snap 11 - 1 2
1 N.C. 1 N.O. 0.34 NSm 23 - 2 4

440P- MALS11E 440P-- MALS11B 440P-- MALS11N5
Acting 11 - 1 2
23 - 2 4
15_ 15_
21_ 21_
44_ 44_
83_ 35cNm 0_10cNm 83_
11-- 12
4 N.C. — — 0.20 NSm 21-- 22 440P-- MALB04E 440P-- MALB04B 440P-- MALB04M9
31-- 32
41-- 42
20_ 20_
44_ 0_ 35cNm 44_
83_ 35cNm 83_
11-- 12
3 N.C. 1 N.O. BBM 0.34 NSm 21-- 22

31-- 32
440P-- MALB13E 440P-- MALB13B 440P-- MALB13M9
43-- 44
26_ 26_
Metal 83_
20_ 20_
44_ 35cN m 0_ 35cN m 44_
83_
Adjustable 11-- 12
Lever 2 N.C. 2 N.O. BBM 0.34 NSm 21-- 22

33-- 34
440P- MALB22E 440P-- MALB22B 440P-- MALB22M9
43-- 44
26_ 26_
35_ 35_
54_ 54_
83_ 35cNm 0_ 35cNm 83_
Snap 11 - 1 2
1 N.C. 1 N.O. 0.34 NSm 23 - 2 4

440P-- MARS11E 440P-- MARS11B 440P-- MARS11N5
Acting 11 - 1 2
23 - 2 4
15_ 15_
21_ 21_
44_ 44_
83_ 35cNm 0_10cNm 83_
11-- 12
4 N.C. — — 0.20 NSm 21-- 22 440P-- MARB04E 440P-- MARB04B 440P-- MARB04M9
31-- 32
41-- 42
20_ 20_
44_ 0_ 44_
83_ 35cN m 35cN m 83_
11-- 12
3 N.C. 1 N.O. BBM 0.34 NSm 21-- 22

31-- 32
440P-- MARB13E 440P-- MARB13B 440P-- MARB13M9
43-- 44
26_ 26_
20_ 20_
44_ 0_ 44_
83_ 35cNm 35cNm 83_
11-- 12
2 N.C. 2 N.O. BBM 0.34 NSm 21-- 22

33-- 34
440P-- MARB22E 440P-- MARB22B 440P-- MARB22M9
Metal Rod 43-- 44
Lever 26_ 26_
Recommended standard cordset, 2 m, 5-pin mini connector (see page 8-- 1 for additional lengths). 889N-- F5AE-- 6F
Recommended standard cordset, 2 m, 12-pin 9 wire (see page 8-- 1 for additional lengths). 889M-- F12X9AE-- 2
N5 = 5--pin mini connector.
M9 = 12--pin M23 connector (use 9 wire).
Not positive opening

Limit Switches

Contact Opening
Characteristics Cat. No.
Typical
Safety Auxiliary Force/Torque 1/2 inch NPT
Description Contacts Contacts Contact Type to Operate Conduit M20 Conduit Connector
32° 32°
90° 20cNm 0° 20cNm 90°
11-12
0.20 N•m
1 N.C. 1 N.O. Snap Acting 23-24
440P-MSRS11E 440P-MSRS11B 440P-MSRS11N5
(1.77 lb•in) 11-12
23-24
10° 10°
17° 0° 17°
90° 20cNm 20cNm 90°
0.20 N•m 11-12

4 N.C. — — 21-22 440P-MSRB04E 440P-MSRB04B 440P-MSRB04M9
(1.77 lb•in) 31-32
41-42 8
17° 17°
90° 20cNm 0° 20cNm 90°
11-12
0.20 N•m
3 N.C. 1 N.O. BBM 21-22
440P-MSRB13E 440P-MSRB13B 440P-MSRB13M9
(1.77 lb•in) 31-32
43-44
23° 23°
17° 17°
90° 20cNm 0° 20cNm 90°
11-12
Metal Spring 0.20 N•m
2 N.C. 2 N.O. BBM 21-22
440P-MSRB22E 440P-MSRB22B 440P-MSRB22M9
Rod ‡ (1.77 lb•in) 33-34
43-44
23° 23°
17° 17°
90° 20cNm 0° 20cNm 90°
11-12
0.20 N•m
440P-MTAS11E 440P-MTAS11B 440P-MTAS11N5
(1.77 lb•in) 11-12
23-24
23° 23°
17° 0° 17°
90° 20cNm 20cNm 90°
0.20 N•m 11-12

4 N.C. — — 21-22 440P-MTAB04E 440P-MTAB04B 440P-MTAB04M9
(1.77 lb•in) 31-32
41-42 8
17° 17°
90° 20cNm 0° 20cNm 90°
11-12
0.20 N•m
3 N.C. 1 N.O. BBM 21-22
440P-MTAB13E 440P-MTAB13B 440P-MTAB13M9
(1.77 lb•in) 31-32
43-44
23° 23°
17° 17°
90° 20cNm 0° 20cNm 90°
11-12
Telescopic 0.20 N•m
2 N.C. 2 N.O. BBM 21-22
440P-MTAB22E 440P-MTAB22B 440P-MTAB22M9
Arm ‡ (1.77 lb•in) 33-34
43-44
23° 23°
17° 17°
90° 20cNm 0° 20cNm 90°
11-12
0.20 N•m
440P-MRRS11E 440P-MRRS11B 440P-MRRS11N5
(1.77 lb•in) 11-12
23-24
23° 23°
17° 0° 17°
90° 20cNm 20cNm 90°
0.20 N•m 11-12

4 N.C. — — 21-22 440P-MRRB04E 440P-MRRB04B 440P-MRRB04M9
(1.77 lb•in) 31-32
41-42 8
17° 17°
90° 20cNm 0° 20cNm 90°
11-12
0.34 N•m
3 N.C. 1 N.O. BBM 21-22
440P-MRRB13E 440P-MRRB13B 440P-MRRB13M9
(3.01 lb•in) 31-32
43-44
23° 23°
17° 17°
90° 20cNm 0° 20cNm 90°
11-12
Large Rubber 0.34 N•m
2 N.C. 2 N.O. BBM 21-22
440P-MRRB22E 440P-MRRB22B 440P-MRRB22M9
Roller‡ (3.01 lb•in) 33-34
43-44
23° 23°
Recommended standard cordset, 2 m, 5-pin mini connector. 889N-F5AE-6F

Recommended standard cordset, 2 m, 12-pin 9-wire. 889M-F12X9AE-2
N5 = 5-pin mini connector.

M9 = 12-pin M23 connector (use 9 wire).

Limit Switches

4 N.C. 1 N.O. 1 N.C. 1 N.O. 3 N.C. 2 N.O. 2 N.C.
41 31 21 11 11 23 43 31 21 11 43 33 21 11
42 32 22 12 12 24 44 32 22 12 44 34 22 12
Same polarity this side of block
N5 Connector 2 Circuit 5-Pin Connector Ratings

Mini Connector Max. Ratings
1 (N.C.) AC DC Applicable Standards
11 12 5-Pin Mini (M12) 300V, 2.5 A 300V, 2.5 A
IEC 61076-2-101:2003
12-Pin (M23) 60V, 2.5 A 60V, 2.5 A
23 24
Auxiliary Circuit (N.O.)
M9 12-Pin M23 Connector

4 N.C. 3 N.C. 1 N.O. 3 N.C.
Connector Pinout Terminal Contact Terminal Contact Terminal Contact
1 11 11 11
N.C. N.C. N.C.
3 12 12 12
4 21 21 21
N.C. N.C. N.C.
8 9 1 6 22 22 22
7 12 10 2
7 31 31 33
11 N.C. N.C. N.O.
6 3 8 32 32 34
5 4
9 41 43 43
N.C. N.O. N.O.
10 42 44 44
12 Ground

17 (0.66) 19 18 (0.70) 64 (2.51)
Dia. 21
(0.82) (0.74) Dia. 7 (0.27)
34 63
48 (1.33)
(1.88) (2.48)
118 30 105
(4.64) (1.18) (4.13)
30 60 30
(1.18) (2.36) (1.18)
60 60 133
(2.36) (2.36) (5.23)
40 33
33 33
40 (1.29) 40
(1.29) (1.57) 43 (1.57) (1.29)
(1.57) 43 43
(1.69) (1.69) (1.69)
Roller Plunger Dome Plunger Short Lever,
5-126
Limit Switches
Approximate Dimensions⎯mm (inches) (continued)

17 (0.66) 64 (2.51)
Dia. 7 (0.27)
85 (3.34)
Max.
172 (6.77) Max. Extension

16
(0.62)
240 (9.44)
Max.
103 (4.05)
5 (0.19) Extension
30
60 4 Dia. 57
(1.18) (2.24)
(2.36) (0.15)
16
(0.62)
40 (1.57) 43 (1.69)
Adjustable Lever
103
60 (4.05)
(2.36)
30
(1.18)
33
40 (1.29)
(1.57) 43
(1.69)
Rod Lever
211
(8.3)
60 30
(2.36) (1.18)
10 (0.39)
Dia.
33
11 (1.29)
40 43
(0.43)
(1.57) (1.69)
Spring Rod
303 (11.92) min
8 Extends to
Ø 50.0 (1.97) (0.31) 900 (35.43) max
R 41…76
(1.61…2.99)
85…120
(3.35…4.725)
60 30
(2.36) (1.18)
33
60 30 11 (1.29)
(2.36) 40 43
(1.18) (0.43) (1.57) (1.69)
Telescopic Arm
40
(1.57) 43
(1.69)
67.6
(2.66)
Adjustable Lever with Rubber Roller

Preferred availability cat. nos. are printed in bold. 5-127
Limit Switches
802K General Purpose Limit Switches
Specifications
Safety Ratings
EN954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN60204-1, NFPA79, EN1088,
Standards
ISO14119, IEC/ EN60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1
Certifications cULus and CE Marked for all applicable directives
Outputs
Contacts 1 N.C. snap acting, 2 N.C. or 4 N.C. slow acting
Auxiliary Contacts 1 N.O. (with 1 N.C.) or 2 N.O. (with 2 N.C.)
Thermal Current (Ilth) 8A
Rated Insulation Voltage 600V AC
Utilization Category Contact Specification
Description (Ue) 600V 500V 240V 120V
The 30 mm metal limit switches conform to A600/AC-15
(le) 1.2 A 1.4 A 3.0 A 6.0 A
EN 50041 and have been developed to
provide a range of options including a (Ue) 600V 500V 250V 125V
N600/DC-13
choice of snap-acting, slow-acting, and (le) 0.4 A 0.55 A 1.1 A 2.2 A
break before make (BBM) with 2- and Operating Characteristics
4-circuit configurations and a choice of Actuation Speed, Max. 250 mm/s
actuator heads. The distance between the
Actuation Speed, Min. 100 mm/min
horizontal mounting holes is 30 mm.
Actuation Frequency, Max. 6000 operations per hour
The operator heads can be rotated in 90°
increments for easy mounting. Mechanical Life 1 x 107 operations with no electrical load
Environmental
Allen-Bradley limit switches can be used in
applications such as moving machine beds, Enclosure Type Rating IP66
crane arms, lifts, elevators, etc. Operating Temperature [C (F)] -25…+65 ° (-13…+149 °)
Operation of these limit switches is Pollution Degree 3
achieved by the sliding action of the Physical Characteristics
moving object deflecting the plunger or Housing Material Die-cast alloy
lever.
Actuator Material Various polymers and metals
ATTENTION It is important that upon Mounting 2 x M5, any position
actuation, moving objects
Vibration IEC 68-2-6 (10…55 Hz, 0.35 amplitude)
should not pass completely
over the switch and allow the Shock IEC 68-2-7 (30 Gn 3 pulses per axis)
plunger or lever to return to its Conduit Entry M20 or 1/2 inch NPT
original position.
Color Black
Conductive pollution occurs, or dry, nonconductive pollution occurs which becomes conductive due to
condensation.
Features
Large selection of actuator heads
Positive operation, forced disconnection
of contacts
Snap-acting or slow break before make
contact blocks
Contacts 1 N.C. + 1 N.O., 2 N.C. + 2
N.O., or 4 N.C.
Conforms to EN 50041, EN 1088, EN
60947-5-1, EN 292, and EN 60204-1

Limit Switches
Product Selection
Contact Opening
Contact Characteristics Cat. No.
Typical
Force/Torque
Description Safety Auxiliary Type to Operate 1/2 inch NPT Conduit M20 Conduit
2.3 4.5
0mm 10N 7.5
11-12
1 N.C. 1 N.O. Snap Acting 13 N (2.9 lb) 23-24

11-12
802K-MRPS11E —
23-24
1.3
2.0 4.0
0mm 10N 7.5
11-12
Metal Roller
2 N.C. 2 N.O. BBM 11 N (2.5 lb) 21-22
802K-MRPB22E —
Plunger 33-34
43-44
2.7
2.7 4.5
0mm 10N 7.5
11-12
1 N.C. 1 N.O. Snap Acting 13 N (2.9 lb) 23-24

11-12
802K-MDPS11E —
23-24
1.6
2.3 4.0
0mm 10N 7.5
11-12
Metal Dome
2 N.C. 2 N.O. BBM 11 N (2.5 lb) 21-22
802K-MDPB22E 802K-MDPB22B
Plunger 33-34
43-44
3.0
35° 35°
54° 0° 35cNm 54° 83°
83° 35 cNm
11 -1 2
0.34 N•m
1 N.C. 1 N.O. Snap Acting 23 -2 4
802K-MSLS11E 802K-MSLS11B
(3.01 lb•in) 11 -1 2
23 -2 4
15° 15°
23° 0° 23°
83° 44 ° 44° 83°
35cNm 10cNm
0.20 N•m 11-12
4 N.C. — — 21-22 802K-MSLB04E —
(1.77 lb•in) 31-32
41-42
23° 23°
44° 35cN m 0° 44°
83° 35cN m 83 °
11-12
Metal Short 0.34 N•m
2 N.C. 2 N.O. BBM 21-22
802K-MSLB22E 802K-MSLB22B
Lever (3.01 lb•in) 33-34
43-44
26° 26°


Limit Switches

Contact Opening
Typical
Safety Auxiliary Force/Torque
Description Contacts Contacts Contact Type to Operate 1/2 inch NPT Conduit M20 Conduit
35° 35°
83° 54° 35cNm 0° 35cNm 54° 83°
11-12
11-12
802K-MMHS11E 802K-MMHS11B
23-24
15° 15°
20° 20°
83° 44° 35cNm 0° 35cNm 44° 83°
Metal Short 11-12
Lever, Metal 2 N.C. 2 N.O. BBM 21-22

33-34
802K-MMHB22E —
Roller 43-44
26° 26°
35° 35°
54° 0° 35cNm 54° 83°
83° 35 cNm
11 -1 2

11 -1 2
802K-MALS11E 802K-MALS11B
23 -2 4
15° 15°
0.34 N•m
(3.01 lb•in) 23° 23°
44° 35cN m 0° 44°
83° 35cN m 83 °
Metal 11-12
Adjustable 2 N.C. 2 N.O. BBM 21-22

33-34
802K-MALB22E 802K-MALB22B
Lever ‡ 43-44
35° 35°
35° 35°
54° 0° 35cNm 54° 83°
83° 35 cNm
11 -1 2

11 -1 2
802K-MARS11E —
23 -2 4
15° 15°
Metal Rod
Lever ‡
Contact Opening
Typical
Safety Auxiliary Force/Torque
Description Contacts Contacts Contact Type to Operate 1/2 inch NPT Conduit M20 Conduit
32° 32°
90° 20cNm 0° 20cNm 90°
11-12
0.20 N•m
802K-MSRS11E 802K-MSRS11B
(1.77 lb•in) 11-12
23-24
10° 10°
Metal Spring
Rod ‡

4 N.C. 1 N.O. 1 N.C. 2 N.O. 2 N.C.
41 31 21 11 11 23 43 33 21 11
42 32 22 12 12 24 44 34 22 12
Same polarity this side of block

Limit Switches

17 (0.66) 19 18 (0.70) 64 (2.51)
21
Dia.
(0.82)
(0.74) Dia. 7 (0.27)
36.6
48 (1.44) 63
(1.88) (2.48)
30 105
118 (1.18) (4.13)
(4.64)
60 30
30 (2.36) (1.18)
(1.18)
60 60 133
(2.36) (2.36) (5.23)
40 33
33
(1.57) (1.29) 40 33
40 (1.29) 43 (1.29)
(1.57) 43 (1.69) (1.57) 43
(1.69) (1.69)
Roller Plunger Dome Plunger Short Lever
240 (9.44)
Max.
5 (0.19) Extension
Dia. 57
(2.24)
211
(8.3) 16
(0.62)
103
60 30 60 (4.05)
(2.36) (1.18) (2.36)
30
(1.18)
33 33
11 (1.29) 40 (1.29)
40 43 (1.57) 43
(0.43)
(1.57) (1.69) (1.69)
Spring Rod Rod Lever
17 (0.66) 64 (2.51)
Dia. 7 (0.27)
85 (3.34)
Max.
172 (6.77) Max. Extension
16
(0.62)
103 (4.05)
30
60 4
(1.18)
(2.36) (0.15)
40 (1.57) 43 (1.69)
Adjustable Lever

Limit Switches
15mm Plastic Position Interlock Switches
Specifications
Standards EN60947-- 5-- 1,EN292-- 1, EN60204-- 1, EN1088
Certifications CE Marked for all applicable directives and CSA NRTL/C
Safety Contacts 1 N.C. positive break
Utilization Category AC 15
AC (Ue) 500 V 250 V 100 V
(le) 1A 2A 5A
DC 250 V 0.5 A, 24 V 2 A
Max. Switched Current/ 500 V/500 VA
Voltage/Load
Imp 1 Thermal Current (lth) 10 A
Minimum Current 5 V 5 mA DC
Safety Contact Gap >2 x 2 mm (0.079 in.)
Rated Insulation Voltage (Ui) 500 V
Imp 2
Rated Impulse Withstand (Uimp) 2500 V
Voltage
Description Auxiliary Contacts 1 N.O.
The Imp offers safety switch Pollution Degree 3
performance of bigger units in the most Actuator Travel for 2.5 mm (0.098 in.)
compact case available. Designed with Positive Opening
two mounting hole options and a choice Break Contact Min. Force 10 N (2.25 lb)
of actuator positions, the Imp will fit in Maximum Actuator Travel 5 mm (0.197 in.)
the most confined spaces.
Maximum Actuation Speed 160 mm (6.29 in.) per sec
Maximum Actuation 2 Cycle per sec
Features Frequency
S Positive operation, forced Case Material UL approved glass filled polyester
disconnection of contacts Actuator Material Acetal
S Contacts, 1 N.C. & 1 N.O. Protection IP30
Conduit Entry 3x breakouts
Operating Temperature [C (F)] - 25}+80q (-- 13}+176q)
Mounting 2 x M3 front or 2 x M4 top
Mechanical Life 10,000,000 operations
Electrical Life 1,000,000 operations
Color Red
Position Interlock Switch

Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . page 5--129
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5--129
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . page 5--129
Operating Levers . . . . . . . . page 5--130

Limit Switches
15mm Plastic Position Interlock Switches
Range of Operation
Imp 1 Imp 2
Selection Guide
Contact Action
Contact Open Contact Closed Conduit Contact Type Operator Type Cat. No.
Imp 1
Top Push
(roller parallel to 440P-- M18001
Roller
0 mm 1 5 Slow break switch front)
1 N.O. &
11/12 3x breakouts before Imp 2
1 N.C.
23/24 make (roller Top Push
440P-- M18002
2.5 perpendicular to Cross Roller
switch front)

10.3 (0.41)
11 (0.43)
2.4
2xM4 (0.09)
5
2xM4 (0.20) 20
Roller (0.79)
Travel
54
(2.13) 4
(0.16)
37.7
(1.48)
6 (0.24)
sq.
15
(0.59) 4
(0.16) 15.2
25 (0.6)
(0.98)
23.3
(0.92)
Wiring Diagram
11 12
23 24
1 N.O. & 1 N.C.

5--129
Limit Switches
Operating Levers
For use with 802T, 802M, 802MC, 802X, 802XR
Roller Levers
Roller Roller
Type Material Dia. Width Cat. No. Type Material Dia. Width Cat. No.
Nylon 0.75I 0.28I 802T--W25
Metal 0.75I 0.27I 802T--W9A Nylon 0.75I 1I 802T--W25D
Non-Adj. Cast Lever
0.75I Radius Steel 0.75I 0.25I 802T--W25A
Nylon 0.75I 0.28I 802T- W1 Steel 0.75I 0.75I 802T--W25B
Non-Adj. Steel Lever
Nylon 0.75I 1I 802T- W1H Ball Bearing 0.75I 0.23I 802T--W25C
2.5I Radius
Dual Nylon 0.75I 1I each 802T--W1HH Roller on Front
Beryllium Copper 0.75I 0.28I 802T--W25E
Steel 0.75I 0.25I 802T- W1A
Nylon 0.75I 0.28I 802T--W25J
Steel 0.75I 0.75I 802T--W1N
Nylon 0.75I 1I 802T--W25K
Non-Adj. Cast Lever Ball Bearing 0.75I 0.23I 802T- W1B
1.5I Radius Steel 0.75I 0.25I 802T--W25L
Roller on Front Beryllium Copper
0.75I 0.28I 802T--W1J
(Nonsparking)
Steel 0.75I 0.75I 802T--W25M
Nylon 0.75I 0.75I 802T--W1L
Non-Adj. Steel Lever Ball Bearing 0.75I 0.23I 802T--W25N
Nylon 0.75I 0.28I 802T--W1E 2.5I Radius
Roller on Rear Beryllium Copper 0.75I 0.28I 802T--W25P
Nylon 0.75I 1I 802T- W1D
Nylon 1.5I 0.28I 802T--W1G Nylon 0.75I 0.28I 802T--W30
Steel 0.75I 0.25I 802T- W1F Nylon 0.75I 1I 802T--W30D

Non-Adj. Cast Lever
1.5I Radius Steel 0.75I 0.75I 802T- W1C Steel 0.75I 0.25I 802T--W30A
Roller on Rear Nylon 0.75I 0.75I 802T--W1M
Steel 0.75I 0.75I 802T--W30B
Nylon 0.75I 0.28I 802T--W20 Non-Adj. Steel Lever
3.0I Radius Ball Bearing 0.75I 0.23I 802T--W30C
Nylon 0.75I 1I 802T--W20D
Roller on Front
Beryllium Copper 0.75I 0.28I 802T--W30E
Steel 0.75I 0.25I 802T--W20A
Steel 0.75I 0.75I 802T--W20B Nylon 0.75I 0.28I 802T--W30J
Non-Adj. Steel Lever Ball Bearing 0.75I 0.23I 802T--W20C Nylon 0.75I 1I 802T--W30K
2.0I Radius
Roller on Front Beryllium Copper 0.75I 0.28I 802T--W20E Steel 0.75I 0.25I 802T--W30L
Nylon 0.75I 0.28I 802T--W20J Steel 0.75I 0.75I 802T--W30M
Nylon 0.75I 1I 802T--W20K Non-Adj. Steel Lever
3.0I Radius Ball Bearing 0.75I 0.23I 802T--W30N
Steel 0.75I 0.25I 802T--W20L Roller on Rear Beryllium Copper 0.75I 0.28I 802T--W30P
Steel 0.75I 0.75I 802T--W20M
Nylon 0.75I 0.28I 802T- W2
Non-Adj. Steel Lever Ball Bearing 0.75I 0.23I 802T--W20N
2.0I Radius Nylon 0.75I 1I 802T- W2D
Roller on Rear Beryllium Copper 0.75I 0.28I 802T--W20P
Nylon 1.5I 0.28I 802T- W2A
Steel 0.75I 0.25I 802T- W2B

Nylon 0.75I 0.75I 802T--W18
Ball Bearing 0.75I 0.23I 802T- W2C
Steel 1.4I 0.27I 802T--W2E

Adjustable Lever
Non-Adj. Steel Lever 1.19I to 3I Radius
Nylon 0.75I 1I 802T--W18A Rubber 1.5I 0.5I 802T--W2R
2 1/8I Radius
Roller on Front
Beryllium Copper 0.75I 0.28I 802T--NX94
Nylon 802T- W17
0.75I
Metal 0.28I 802T--W17B
Adjustable Lever Nylon 1.5I 802T--W17A

1.19I to 3.5I Radius

Limit Switches
Operating Levers
Roller Levers (continued) Roller Levers—Corrosion-Resistant

Roller Roller
Type Material Dia. Width Cat. No. Type Material Dia. Width Cat. No.
Nylon; L.H. Roller on Type 316 stainless
Front; R.H. Roller on 0.75I 0.28I 802T--W4 steel roller, roller pin
Back and clamp pin
Steel; L.H. Roller on
0.75I 0.25I 802MC- W1A
Front; R.H. Roller on 0.75I 0.25I 802T--W4B One--piece cast
Back aluminum arm is
1.5I Radius
Nylon; Both Roller on Front protected with
0.75I 0.28I 802T- W4A TUFRAMR
Rollers on Front
Nylon; Both Nylon Roller
0.75I 0.28 802T--NX115
Rollers on Rear
Nylon; Both One-piece cast
0.75I 1I 802T--W4F 1.5I 0.28I 802MC--W1G
Rollers on Front aluminum arm is
1.5I Radius protected with
Fork Lever Steel; Both TUFRAMR
0.75I 0.25I 802T- W4C Roller on Rear
1.5I Radius Rollers on Front
Nylon; L.H. Roller on
Back; R.H. Roller on 0.75I 0.28I 802T--W4D
Front Nylon Roller
Nylon R.H. Adj. 0.75I 0.28I 802T--W6 One-piece cast
Steel R.H. Adj. 0.75I 0.25I 802T- W6A 0.75I 0.28I 802MC--W12
aluminum arm is
Ball Bearing protected with
0.75I 0.23I 802T--W6B Non-Adj. Offset Lever TUFRAMR
R.H. Adj. 1.44I Radius
Nylon L.H. Adj. 0.75I 0.28I 802T--W6C Roller on Front
Steel L.H. Adj. 0.75I 0.25I 802T--W6D
Micrometer Ball Bearing Type 316
Adjustment Lever 0.75I 0.23I 802T--W6E stainless steel roller,
L.H. Adj.
1.5I Radius roller pin,
Nylon R.H. Adj. 0.75I 1I 802T--W6F clamp pin and
adjustable
Nylon 0.75I 0.28I 802T--W7 lever arm 0.75I 0.25I 802MC- W2B
Block is cast
Steel 0.75I 0.25I 802T--W7A aluminum
Adjustable
Non-Adj. One-Way 1.19I --3I protected with
Lever Radius TUFRAMR
Ball Bearing 0.75I 0.23I 802T--W7B
1.5I Radius
Nylon 0.75I 0.28I 802T--W12
Steel 0.75I 0.25I 802T- W12A

Non-Adj. Offset Lever
1.44I Radius
Roller on Front Bearing Roller 0.75I 0.23I 802T--W12B
Nylon 0.75I 0.28I 802T--W12E
Non-Adj. Offset Lever Steel 0.75I 0.25I 802T--W12F

1.44I Radius
Roller on Rear
Do not use on maintained contact limit switches.

When mounted on Plug-In devices, the offset lever provides equivalent cam tracking to the
NonPlug-In devices using catalog number 802T--W1 levers.
TUFRAM is a synergistic coating which combines the advantages of anodizing with a
controlled infusion of PTFE for added corrosion resistance.
The micrometer adjustment roller lever is designed especially for installations where the
position of the roller is a critical factor. This lever has a pivoted roller which can be turned
laterally. After clamping the lever to the switch shaft, the position of the roller can be
precisely adjusted through an arc of 7.5q on either side of the center or straight-line position.

5--131
Limit Switches
Operating Levers
Rod Levers Rod Levers—Corrosion-Resistant

Type Material Dia. Cat. No. Type Material Dia. Cat. No.
Stainless Steel Rod
0.13I 802T- W3
5I Long Type 316 stainless steel
Stainless Steel Rod rod 5I long
0.13I 802T- W3B
8.5I Long
0.13I 802MC- W3
Block is cast
Stainless Steel Rod
0.13I 802T--NX50 aluminum protected with
12I Long
TUFRAMR
0.13I 802T- W3A
Stainless Steel Rod
11.5I Long
0.08I 802T- W3F
Type 316 stainless steel
Stainless Steel Rod rod 11.5I long
0.13I 802T--NX159
14I Long
0.08I 802MC- W3A
Block is cast
aluminum protected with
TUFRAMR
Nylon Rod 802T- W3C

0.25I
12I Long 802T--NX142
Nylon Rod
12I long
0.25I 802MC- W3C
Block is cast
aluminum protected with
TUFRAMR
Stainless Steel Rod

0.06I 802T- W5
5I Long
Nylon Rod
Only 0.25I WF25507
Stainless Steel Rod

0.06I 802T--W8
5I Long One-Way
Nylatron Looped Rod 6I

0.18I 802T- W14
Long 2I Wide Loop
Nylatron Looped Rod 9I

0.18I 802T--NX119
Long 2I Wide Loop
Steel Rod
0.25I 802T--W16
9I Long
Nylon Rod
0.25I 802T--W16A
9I Long
Do not use on maintained contact limit switches.

Recommended for use with low operating torque switches.
Not for use with 802M--NPY5 or 802M--ASY5 type switches.
TUFRAMR is a synergistic coating which combines the advantages of anodizing with a
controlled infusion of PTFE for added corrosion resistance.
Recommended for high impact applications.

Limit Switches
Operating Levers

45.21 45.21
19 45.24 19 (1.78) (1.78)
(0.75) (1.78) (0.75) 17.463 38.1 26.90
A (0.69) (1.5) (1.06)
38.1 38.1
(1.5) (1.5) 38.1
12.7 (1.5)
12.7
(0.5) (0.5) 12.7
(0.5)
802T-- W1C (Dim. A = 0.81s); 802T-- W1D 802T-- W1G
802T-- W1E and 802T-- W1F (Dim. A = 1.03s) Shipping Wt. 43g (1.5oz) Shipping Wt. 28g (1oz)
Shipping Wt. 57g (2oz). (W1C), 1 oz. (W1E),
43g (1.5oz) (W1F)
50.8 50.8
38.1 (2) 19 D (2)
(1.5) 45.21 (0.75) A
(1.78)
65.02 76.2
19 (2.56) 85.7 (3)
(0.75) 76.2
52.32 (3.375) Max
(3)
(2.06) Max
Max
95.25 58.67 39.62 30.23
(3.75) (2.31) 39.62 (1.56) (1.19)
38.1 Min (1.56)
(1.5) Max
Min 19
(0.75)
12.7 23.88 12.7
(0.5) (0.5) 12.7
(0.94) (0.5)
802T-- W1H 802T-- W2 & 802T-- W2B (Dim. A = 1.78s);
Shipping Wt. 43g (1.5o ) 802T-- W2C (Dim. A = 1.81s)
802T-- W2A Shipping Wt. 57g (2oz)
Shipping Wt. 57g (2oz)
70.61 42.16
19 D 38.86
(2.78) (1.66)
(0.75) (1.53)
56.39
(2.22) 3.18 1.98
(0.125) (0.080) for 802T--W3F
76.2 127 292.5
(3) Max (11.5) 3.05
30.23 (5) (0.12) for 802T--W3A
(1.19) Min.
85.7 39.62
(3.375) Max (1.56)
50.8
19 12.7 12.7 (2) 50.8
(0.75) (0.5) (0.5) 12.7 (2)
(0.5)
802T-- W2D 802T-- W3 802T-- W3A and 802T-- W3F
Shipping Wt. 57g (2oz) Shipping Wt. 43g (1.5oz) Shipping Wt. 57g (2oz)
38.86
42.16
(1.53)
(1.66) 13.46
3.05 19 Dia 19 Dia (0.53)
6.35
(0.12) (0.75) (0.75) 26.16
(0.25)
304.8 (1.03)
215.9
(8.5) (12)
38.1 12.7
(1.5) (0.5)
45.21
(1.78)
50.8 50.8
12.7 (2) 12.7 (2)
(0.5) (0.5)
802T-- W4 and 802T-- W4D
802T-- W3B and 802T-- W3F 802T-- W3C Shipping Wt. 43g (1.5oz) 802T-- W4B
Shipping Wt. 43g (1.5oz) Shipping Wt. 57g (2oz) Shipping Wt. 57g (2oz)

5--133
Limit Switches
Operating Levers
Approximate Dimensions [mm (in.)] (continued)

44.45
45.21 61.98 (1.75)
53.97 19 Dia 19 Dia (2.44)
(1.78) 1.52
(2.125) (0.75) (0.75) 49.28
19 Dia 19 Dia (0.6)
39.62 (1.94)
(0.75) (0.75)
(1.56) 127
(5)
12.7
38.1 D D
12.7 (0.5)
38.1 (1.5)
(1.5) (0.5) 45.21
(1.78) 12.7 50.8
(0.5) (2)
802T-- W4A and 802T-- W4C 802T-- W4F 802T-- W5

Shipping Wt. 57g (2oz) Shipping Wt. 57g (2oz) Shipping Wt. 28g (1oz)
19 Dia
(0.75) 36.58
19 Dia 69.85 (1.44)
(0.75) 45.21 19 Dia (2.75)
(1.78) (0.75) 57.15
(2.25) 38.1
(1.5)
38.1
(1.5) 38.1
12.7 (1.5)
(0.5) 45.21
12.7 (1.78)
50.8 (0.5) 12.7
(2) (0.5)
802T-- W6, 802T-- W6A, 802T-- W7, 802T-- W7A

802T-- W6B, 802T-- W6E 802T-- W6F and 802T-- W7B
Shipping Wt. 57g (2oz) Shipping Wt. 57g (2oz) Shipping Wt. 57g (2oz)
36.83
19 Dia (1.45)
11.18 36.58 45.21 (0.75) 30.99
(0.44) (1.44) 19 Dia (1.78) (1.22)
(0.75)
127 39.62
(5) (1.56)
36.58
(1.44)
19
(0.75)
12.7
12.7
(0.5)
(0.5)
12.7 45.21
(0.5) (1.78)
802T-- W12 Shipping Wt. 1 oz. and
802T-- W8 802T-- W9 802T-- W12A 802T-- W6B, 802T-- W6E
Shipping Wt. 43g (1.5oz) Shipping Wt. 28g (1oz) Shipping Wt. 43g (1.5oz)
50.8 19.05 19.05

(2) (0.75) 17.02 (0.75)
7.11
(0.67) (0.28)
228.6 á0.05
6.35 (9.0)
(0.25) 50.8
152.4 71.88 71.88 50.8
(6) (2.0) 7.11 5.84
(2.83) (2.83) (2.0)
(0.28) (0.23)
11.1
7.98 (0.31) Dia. (0.43)
+0.002
--0.000 11.43 11.43
(0.45) (0.45)
802T-- W14 802T-- W16 802T-- W20 802T-- W20J

Shipping Wt. 43g (1.5oz) 802T-- W16A Shipping Wt. 57g (2oz) Shipping Wt. 57g (2oz)

Limit Switches
Operating Levers
Replacement Parts
Replacement Actuators for Bul. 440P Limit Switches
Levers Rods
Description Cat. No. Description Cat. No.
Short lever with nylon roller for 440P-
ASL* or -AWL* 440P-WA1
See page 5-115.
Adjustable metal rod for 440P-MAR*
Short lever with metal roller for 440P- 440P-WM3
See page 5-124.
ASL* or -AWL* 440P-WA1A
See page 5-115.
Short lever with wide roller for 440P-ASL*

or -AWL* 440P-WA1B Metal spring rod for 440P-MSR*
See page 5-115. 440P-WM4
See page 5-125.

CSL* or -CHM* 440P-WC1 Note: The actuator is included with the purchase of every Bul. 440P limit
See page 5-118. switch.
Short lever with metal roller for 440P-
CSL* or -CHM* 440P-WC1A
See page 5-118.
Telescopic Arm
MSL* or -MMH* 440P-WM1 Description Cat. No.
See page 5-123 & 5-124.
Short lever with metal roller for 440P-
MSL* or -MMH* 440P-WM1A
See page 5-123 & 5-124. Telescopic arm for 440P-MTA*
440P-WM5
See page 5-125.
Adjustable lever arm with nylon roller for
440P-AAL* or -AA1L* 440P-WA2A
See page 5-115.
Adjustable lever arm with steel roller for Note: The actuator is included with the purchase of every Bul. 440P limit
440P-AAL* or -AA1L* 440P-WA2B switch.
See page 5-115.
Adjustable lever with nylon roller for
440P-CAL*, -CRR*, -MRR* 440P-WC2
See page 5-119 & 5-124.
Adjustable lever with metal roller for
440P-CAL* or -CRR* 440P-WC2B
See page 5-119.
Adjustable lever with large rubber roller
for 440P-CAL*, -CRR*, -MRR* 440P-WC2A
See page 5-119 & 5-124.
Adjustable lever with nylon roller for
440P-MAL* or -MRR* 440P-WM2
See page 5-124.
Adjustable lever with metal roller for
440P-MAL* or -MRR* 440P-WM2A
See page 5-124.
Note: The actuator is included with the purchase of every Bul. 440P limit
switch.

Limit Switches
Operating Levers

Levers
Ø13.5X5.2 Ø13.5x5.2 Ø13.5X25.4
(Ø0.53x0.21) (Ø0.53x0.21) (Ø0.53x1)
Plastic Roller Metal Roller Plastic Roller
11.1 11.1
(0.44) 35.5
(0.44) (1.40)
6.3 6.3
(0.25) 33.85
(0.25) (1.33)
8.45
(0.33)
6.3
25 25 (0.25)
6 (0.99) 6
(0.99) (0.24)
(0.24)
25
(0.99) 6
R8 (0.24)
R8 2 (R0.32) 2
(R0.32) Ø7 Ø7 (0.08)
(0.08) (Ø0.28)
(Ø0.28) 15.3 15.3
(0.60) (0.60)
R8 2
(R0.32) Ø7
(Ø0.28) (0.08)
8.3
(0.33)
Cat. No. 440P-ASL_ or AWL_ Cat. No. 440P-ASL_ or AWL_ Cat. No. 440P-ASL_ or AWL_
Short Lever (Plastic Roller) Short Lever (Metal Roller) Short Lever (Wide Roller)
Ø17.5x7 Ø17.5x7 Ø17.5x7

(Ø0.69x0.28) (Ø0.69x0.28) (Ø0.69x0.28)
Plastic Roller Metal Roller Plastic Roller
9.6 9.6
(0.38) (0.38) 16.9
(0.67)
11.9
(0.47)
26 Ø5.2 26 Ø5.2
36 (1.02) (Ø0.21) 36 (1.02) (Ø0.21)
(1.42) (1.42)
38
Ø20 Ø20 46 (1.5)
(Ø0.79) 8 (Ø0.79) 8 (1.81)
(0.32) (0.32)
14.9 14.9 15.56
(0.59) (0.59) (0.61)
Ø7.2
(Ø0.28) 11.5
(0.45)
Cat. No. 440P-CSL_ or CHM_ Cat. No. 440P-CSL_ or CHM_ Cat. No. 440P-MSL_ or MMH_
Short Lever (Plastic Roller) Short Lever (Metal Roller) Short Lever (Plastic Roller)
Ø17.5x7 Ø17.5x7 Ø50.0X8.0

(Ø0.69x0.28) (Ø0.69x0.28) (Ø1.97x0.31)
Metal Roller Plastic or Rubber Roller
Metal Roller
16.9
(0.67) 11.9
(0.47)
11.9 6.1
(0.47) 10.9 (0.24)
(0.43)
5.6
(0.22)
38
46 (1.5)
(1.81)
15.56
(0.61)
Ø7.2 75.1
(Ø0.28) 11.5 (2.96) 44.8 75.1
(0.45) (1.76) (2.96)
44.8
(1.76)
9.5
(0.37) 9.5
Ø5.2 (0.37)
(Ø0.21) Ø5.2
13.8 2 (Ø0.21) 2
(0.54) (0.08) (0.08)
13.8
(0.54)
Cat. No. 440P-MSL_ or MMH_ Cat. No. 440P-CAL_, -CRR_, -MAL_, and -MRR_ Cat. No. 440P-CAL_, -CRR_, and -MRR_
Short Lever (Metal Roller) Adjustable Lever (Plastic & Metal Roller) Adjustable Lever (Large Rubber Roller)
Ø17.5x7
(Ø0.69x0.28)
Plastic Roller
R27 (Min)
R105 (Max)
105.2
(4.14) 80
(3.15)
9.5
(0.37) Ø5.2
(Ø0.21) 2
(0.08)
14
(0.55)
Cat. No. 440P-AAL_ or AA1L_

Adjustable Lever Arm (Plastic & Metal Roller)

5-136 Preferred availability cat. nos. are printed in bold.
Limit Switches
Operating Levers
Rods
8.5
(0.34)
Ø11
(Ø0.43)
17.6
(0.69)
11.5
(0.45) 11
(0.43)
19.3
24.3 (0.76) 12.73
(0.96) (0.50)
160 113
(6.30) (4.45)
16.18
(0.64)
400
Ø7.2
(Ø0.28)
Ø3
(Ø0.12)
Cat. No. 440P-MAR_ Cat. No. 440P-MSR_

Adjustable Metal Rod Metal Spring Rod
Telescopic Arms
Ø11
(Ø0.43)
FULLY EXTEND TO
Min. 801 (31.54),
RETRACT TO Max. 206 (8.11)
51
(2.01)
Ø7.25
(Ø0.29)
Cat. No. 440P-MTA_

Telescopic Arm

Limit Switches
Notes


Limit Td001 en P

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Limit Td001 en P

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Limit Td001 en P

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Limit Switches

General Information Quick Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5--2

Products 801 General Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5--9

Indexes Cat. No. Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 13--1

Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs.

801 802G 802M and 802MC 802R

Temperature Rating x --0}40qC x 0}110qC x 0}80qC x --29}121qC

5--2 Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs.

802T 802T 802T 802X 802XR

Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs.

802B 802B 802B 802T

Temperature Rating x -10}70qC x -10}80qC x -10}80qC x --18C}+110qC

Actuators x Rotary arm x Top push x Top push x Lever

5--4 Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs.

440P- A 440P- C 440P- M 440P- M Operating Lever

x 2}+70qC x -25}80qC x -25}80qC x -25}80qC

x NEMA 1, IP66 and IP67 x IP66 x IP66 x IP30

Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs.

5--6 Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs.

Location and Installation

Wrong Right Wrong Right

Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs.

5--8 Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs.

Description Figure 6 Figure 14

Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs.

Contact Arrangements and Ratings

K Lever Contact Pos.

Ambient Temperature Range

5--10 Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs.

Approximate Dimensions [mm (in.)]

Figure 5, 6, 19 Figure 7, 8 Figure 9

Figure 10, 11 Figure 12 Figure 13

Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs.

5--12 Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs.

802G-- GP DC Contact Rating (Maximum per Pole, Same Polarity)

Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs.

Approximate Dimensions [mm (in.)]

802G-- GP with 802G-- W10 Lever

Modification for Operating Levers

The indicating light is to be internally 6.35 mm (0.25 in.) Nylon

5--14 Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs.

Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs.

5--16 Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs.

Complete Switch Operator Head Switch Body Only

Levers—See page 5--130 for a complete listing of operating levers.

Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs.

Approximate Dimensions [mm (in.)]

Levers—See page 5--130 for a complete listing of operating levers.

5--18 Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs.

Torque to Travel to Travel to Cat. No.

Approximate Dimensions [mm (in.)]

61.9 54.8 57.9

Levers—See page 5--130 for a complete listing of operating levers.

Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs.

2 Clockwise or 1 2 1 2 802M-- AMY5 802M-- XY5

Approximate Dimensions [mm (in.)]

Levers—See page 5--130 for a complete listing of operating levers.

5--20 Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs.

Description Figure 6 Figure 14

24V DC Switches 5-Pin Mini-Type Receptacle 10-Pin Mini-Type Receptacle

See wiring diagrams page 5--24}5--26.

Requires switch to be rated for 24V DC operation.